JP6677218B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball entering a starting port provided in a game area is detected by a detection sensor (winning switch), a starting prize is generated and a jackpot lottery is performed. There is known a configuration in which when a jackpot is won in a lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1). Further, in a conventional pachinko machine, for a guide passage that guides a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance to a starting opening, it may be detected by a detection sensor that branches from the guiding passage and detects a winning in the starting opening. By providing a non-branch passage, even if a game ball enters the entrance, a part of the entry may not be a winning prize.

JP 2016-22147 A

  However, as typified by the above-described gaming machine, when another passage is provided so that a part of the game ball that has entered the guide passage from a predetermined entrance does not become a prize giving a predetermined privilege, There may be room for improvement in configurations that allow the player to properly recognize the presence of the aisle.

  Therefore, the present invention is to prevent a part of a game ball entered from a predetermined entrance leading to a detection unit to which a predetermined privilege is given when a game ball is detected from becoming a prize for giving a predetermined privilege. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably displaying the existence of the other passage.

The gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to solve the above problems,
A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball fired from a launch device flows down,
A ball guiding nail portion comprising a plurality of gaming nails erected side by side so as to be able to guide game balls in a predetermined direction side in the game area,
A plate-shaped light-transmitting nail supporting member having a light-transmitting property capable of seeing from the front side to the rear side, supporting a base end side of the plurality of game nails constituting the ball guiding nail portion,
A first passage provided on a rear side of the light-transmitting nail supporting member;
A passage component that guides a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance among the game balls flowing down the game area to the first passage;
A detection unit capable of detecting a game ball flowing down along the first passage;
A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detection unit;
A second passage provided in a direction different from the first passage on an upstream side of the detection unit, wherein when a game ball enters from the first passage, the game ball is detected by the detection unit A second passage that is not performed,
An information display unit for displaying predetermined privilege no grant information that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area where the predetermined privilege is not granted when the game ball enters,
The information display unit is located rearward of the light-transmitting nail support member, does not overlap the plurality of gaming nails in a front view of the gaming machine, and a player's viewpoint is located in front of the gaming machine. Are provided at positions overlapping the inner sides of the plurality of game nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction.

  According to the present invention, when a game ball is detected, a part of a game ball entered from a predetermined entrance leading to a detection part to which a predetermined privilege is provided is prevented from becoming a prize for providing a predetermined privilege. A game machine capable of suitably displaying the existence of the other passage can be provided.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in an open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state. Front view of pachinko machine Front view of pachinko machine with front block removed Front view of gaming board Back side perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flow chart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Time chart for explaining the time when the suggestion effect appears in the fluctuation display of decorative symbols FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing screen transition of the decorative design display device along the time chart of FIG. 13. Schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative symbol display device along the time chart of FIG. Schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative symbol display device along the time chart of FIG. (A) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen on which a player can select whether or not to restore a fluctuating display of decorative symbols performed before transition to the special gaming state in the special gaming state, b) is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is restored in the special game state The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. Time chart for explaining the suggestion effect cancel function Schematic diagram showing a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment that is an own machine and another pachinko machine communicably connected to the pachinko machine. The screen figure which shows an example of the display content of the decoration symbol display device when operating the selection operation device during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decoration symbol. The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect in the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. A diagram for explaining an example for facilitating an increase in the number of times a unit game right related to a special symbol is reserved. Front view of a game board in a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment (A) is a front view of a reel device, (b) is a front view of a middle reel. Front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device Schematic diagram showing the transition of the display by the reel device when the second sub-symbol advance notice is performed Schematic diagram showing the transition of the display by the reel device when the second sub-symbol advance notice is performed Schematic diagram showing transition of display by the reel device when a countdown notice is performed (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device in the game board, and (b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration of the game board taken along line AA in FIG. 30A is a simplified cross-sectional view of a main configuration including a reel device taken along the line BB in FIG. 30A, and FIG. 30B illustrates a school of fish displayed beyond the display area of the reel device. Front view for (A) is an enlarged front view near the upper and lower starting prize devices in the gaming machine of the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the gaming machine along line CC in FIG. 32 (a), (C) is a top view of FIG. 32 (a) viewed from the upper side, and (d) is a vicinity of the information display unit when the player playing the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment views the lower left direction obliquely. Diagram showing how people look (A) is a front view of the reel device of the ninth embodiment, (b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the reel device taken along line DD of FIG. 33 (a), and (c) is a front view of the gaming machine. Is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine cut in a vertical direction at a position substantially at the center in the left-right direction in (a), (d) is a top view of the pressing operation device and the wave lamp (A) is a front view of the reel device when the display area of each symbol row by three reels is a basic display area, and (b) is a reduced display area of each symbol row by three reels. A front view of the reel device in the case of the display area, (c) is a top view of the reel device schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display area of the symbol row, and (d) is a reduced display area of the symbol row. Top view of a reel device schematically showing the state of the reel device

  With regard to the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball game machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described, followed by a description of a variation and other types of gaming machines. First, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural configuration>
First, the configuration of the structural part of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 2 shows a front block 102 and an intermediate block 103 integrated with an outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Is shown. FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 has been removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each drawing, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displaceable.

  The outer frame 101 has a function as main body support means for supporting the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrangular frame body in which a top plate 111, a bottom plate 112, a left plate 113, and a right plate 114 are assembled. And is firmly fixed by fixtures (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 101 or the main body corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101. A structure in which a supporting mechanism for supporting and a part of a locking mechanism for locking a main body thereof is provided in the island facility may be adopted.

  Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end (left side) in the left-right direction when the pachinko machine 100 is viewed from the front. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the outer frame 101, for example, as shown in FIG. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, a shaft provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support provided in the outer frame 101, and a shaft hole provided in the shaft support is provided. Is configured to be rotatable by being inserted. The configuration in which the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side, and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined detachment operation, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a predetermined amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a predetermined amount. You. Thus, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be detached from the outer frame 101.

  On the front side of the intermediate block 103, the front block 102 is disposed so as to overlap, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block supporting mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 to be rotatable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removing operation. It is configured to be possible.

  The rear block 104 is disposed on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 so as to overlap with the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are arranged by rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detachment operation.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operating mechanism operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism is provided. As shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

  When a clockwise rotation operation using an operation key (not shown) is performed as a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 and the movable portion 143 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is released, and the intermediate block 103 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

  On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided on the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to a left rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is opened and closed with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism for restricting opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. By the rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing are prohibited (opening / closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing are permitted (opening / closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation. It has been.

  The rear block opening / closing restricting mechanism includes, for example, two open / close restricting portions 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one open / close restricting portion 150C provided in the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. . These three opening / closing restricting portions 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change their engagement states with the opening portions arranged to be overlapped in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation. And an openable / closeable posture corresponding to the openable / closeable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the opening / closing allowance posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is allowed to open / close with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open / close prohibition posture and the open / close permissible posture may be switched between the open / close prohibition state and the open / close permissible state by changing at least one of the positions and directions of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. It may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to a change in posture when a component member in each device shifts between a plurality of postures.

  Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed on the rear block 104 in the open / close prohibition state of the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed through the opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the openable / closable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103. Has been raised.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulating mechanism for regulating the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. The game ball movement regulation mechanism is configured by, for example, a combination of a flow-down regulation piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change section 162 provided in the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is configured to be biased by a coil spring (not shown) to the front side where the front block 102 is located.

  In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down regulating piece 161 is in a movement-permissible state in which a game ball is allowed to flow down. The change unit 162 presses and pushes the rear side of the intermediate block 103. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is arranged to be shifted rearward with respect to a guide path (not shown) for guiding a game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (an open state of the front block 102), the pressing of the flow-down regulating piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, a movement-prohibiting state in which the flow-down regulating piece 161 projects toward the front block 102 is set. The downflow restricting piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the downflow of the game ball to the downstream side. Thereby, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the previous block 102 is prohibited.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 100 has the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101, for example, at the lower end of the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (left side in rear view). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the operation is performed is provided. Also, as shown in FIG. 3, for example, the intermediate block 103 is provided at the lower end on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and at the rotation front end (right side in front view). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided for 103.

  Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 forms a substantially entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100, is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates a front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 mainly includes a base frame 201 made of a synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components before and after the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front side of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached to. In a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 constituting the front block 102 are combined, the opening 210A is formed to penetrate in a front-rear direction over a wide area excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, An auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a firing operation device 250 operated by a player to fire the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 includes, as a part of the front decorative body 210, an opening peripheral portion 211 surrounding the periphery of the opening 210A, and a front protruding portion below the opening 210A. An upper protruding portion 217, a lower protruding portion 218 positioned below the upper protruding portion 217 and protruding forward, and an upper protruding portion 217 and a lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219 formed of a substantially flat region located on the back side of the projection operation device 218 and on which the firing operation device 250 is arranged is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is disposed on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is disposed on the lower protrusion 218.

  The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visible while closing the opening 210A formed through in the front-rear direction when the base frame 201 and the front decoration body 210 are combined. The center panel 220 has, for example, a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light-transmitting light fitted into the front side of the panel frame 221 as shown in FIGS. And a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap behind the panel frame 221. I have.

  The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing the game balls obtained according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent from the game hall. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage unit 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 has an inlet 231A for allowing game balls to flow into the storage unit 231 from the inside of the pachinko machine 100, and an outlet (not shown) for allowing game balls to flow from the storage unit 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outlet is provided. By opening the release port, the game ball is released from the storage section 231 to the player without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removing mechanism has a function of switching the destination of the game ball between the outlet and the outlet.

  The game balls obtained in accordance with the progress of the game and the game balls lent in response to a lending operation performed on a lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inlet 231A. The storage section 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which game balls owned by the player are manually inserted, or game balls lent out at the game hall are supplied.

  The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a line. When the ball removing operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 232 is not performed, the game ball is guided to a launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation is being performed on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes a storage part 241 having inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and a discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and a discharge port 241B. The ball removing mechanism 243 for operating the ball removing mechanism 243 is provided. The game balls or the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but flow into the storage section 241 through the inflow port 241A when the storage section 231 is full. In addition, even in response to the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C.

  The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the release port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball-pulling operation member 242 by the ball-pulling operation member 242, the release port 241B is kept in the open state until the ball-pulling operation member 242 is returned (for example, a pressing operation again). Will be maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241 is provided behind the inflow port 241A.

  The firing operation device 250 includes, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, a pedestal 251 protruding forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decoration 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that a player is in contact with the firing handle 252, A firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) for disabling the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, game balls are emitted from the firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) at an intensity corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. Note that when the contact sensor 254 has not detected contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or when the firing operation has been disabled by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 has been rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the firing device 330.

  Further, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decoration 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge 211 includes an upper central edge 211A, a left upper edge 211B and an upper right edge 211C located on the left and right sides of the upper central edge 211A, and a left upper edge. A left edge portion 211D located below the upper edge portion 211B and a right edge portion 211E located below the upper right edge portion 211C as light emitting portions. Devices 271 to 275 are provided.

  The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper center edge 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left edge 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting corresponding to the upper right edge 211C. It comprises a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 has one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and integrates and electrically connects these electronic components. And a printed circuit board.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with, for example, an upper left sound output port 211F and an upper right sound output port 211G above the opening peripheral portion 211 thereof. An upper left sound device 281 and an upper right sound device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right sound output port 211G and the upper right sound output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located at the back (rear) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

  In the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, for example, a game ball lending device 290 is provided on the upper right side of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the balance of bills, cards, and the like inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged alongside the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending. A lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the game, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, and the like inserted into the card unit. When a bill or a card is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which numerical values corresponding to the amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. In response, a predetermined number of game balls are lent from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated with the rent of the game balls. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, a card in which a banknote equivalent or a balance corresponding to the balance is recorded is returned from the card unit in accordance with the return operation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows a player to perform an input operation different from a firing operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a pressing operation device 261 that can perform a pressing operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up, down, left, and right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player-related operation It is possible to execute an effect setting operation or the like for inputting information and executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game arcade as necessary. It has been.

  For example, although the details will be described later, the pressing operation device 261 functions as an operation device for causing a predetermined suggestive effect to appear during a period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7). I do. The “suggested effect” is an effect that indicates the degree (or expectation) of the ease of transition to the special game state after the decorative symbol is definitely displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  Note that an input operation unit (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) with which the player contacts the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or driven by input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that the operation such as vibration is configured to be executable by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)). By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanying the input operation, such as actively prompting the input operation.

  Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and has a function of attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104 to integrate the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including a game board 400 to a base frame 301.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) which is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism for rotatably and detachably supporting the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism for fixing the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. A firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) for emitting, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress comprehensively, and based on commands from the main control device 370. A sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effects and state notification.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding game balls discharged from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B where the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are formed of various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271). 275, the upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282) and devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rear block 104. Including the wiring, the signal relay device 311 has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 has a flat base 401 having a through hole through which game balls such as an outlet 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. 402, an inner rail 403 smoothly curved from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, a return ball preventing mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and an upper right end of the outer rail 402. And a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball fired from a firing device 330 described later into a game area. The return ball preventing mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once discharged into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed between the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 facing in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. The anti-recoil member 405 has a shock-absorbing property to prevent a large rebound of the game ball such that a game ball heading to the right over the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left through the upper center again. For example, it is formed of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage 163 is formed in a lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the outer rail 402 and the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the firing device 330 in the direction of the firing path 401B, and is fired from the firing device 330 but not beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning in the passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 disposed below the gap.

  The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (falls down) in the game area while dropping by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which a region having a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is mostly used. The outer periphery of the game area is generally defined by an outer rail 402 and an inner rail 403, the front side is defined by a rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is defined by a base 401 of the game board 400. Is divided into In addition, various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to a firing position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (see FIG. 10). ), A firing mechanism 333 that ejects a game ball placed at a firing position, a firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a game ball fired from the firing mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing passage 401B. The firing device 330 operates in response to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 as described above, and the driving control of the firing solenoid 334 changes according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 to adjust the firing force.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a two-part board case 371 that houses the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace.

  The main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, a mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. Thus, not only the rear side (front side) of the main controller 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main controller 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main controller 370 is attached to the gaming board 400. It can be easily checked with the camera attached. Main controller 370 may be connected to attachment portion 372 such that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the state of removal of main controller 370 may be easily managed.

  The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10), and a board case 391 having a split structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is, for example, like the main control board 920, and is housed in a light-transmitting board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

  Here, various structures arranged in the game area in the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a downflow changing member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the downflow direction or downflow speed of the game ball, and a center arranged at a substantially center of the base 401. The structure 420, a middle starting winning device 431 arranged below the central structure 420, and a starting device according to a second special symbol arranged lower right with respect to the central structure 420 (specifically, The right start winning device 432), the big winning devices 433 and 434 arranged below the right starting winning device 432 (specifically, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434), and the right starting A starting device 436 related to a normal symbol disposed above (upstream) the winning device 432 and a starting device 436 disposed on the upper right side of the gaming board 400 and above (upstream) the upper and lower big winning devices 433 and 434. 435 with the consecutive action device Located on the left and right sides of the middle starting winning device 431 a regular winning device 439A, and a 439B.

  The middle start winning device 431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left middle starting winning device 431A and the right middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The left middle starting winning device 431A is a starting device according to a first special symbol, and the right middle starting winning device 431B is a starting device according to a second special symbol similar to the right starting winning device 432. That is, the middle start winning device 431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device according to a first special symbol and a starting device according to a second special symbol.

  The middle starting winning device 431 includes a distribution unit 620 that distributes a game ball entered from the entrance 611 to either the left middle starting winning device 431A or the right middle starting winning device 431B. The distribution unit 620 is configured so that the winning devices 431A and 431B to which the game balls are distributed are alternately switched every time the game balls enter from the entrance 611. As a result, the game ball that has entered the middle starting winning device 431 basically enters the left middle starting winning device 431A or the right middle starting winning device 431B alternately.

  In addition, the middle start winning device 431 has a very low probability of a part of the game ball entered from the entrance 611 without entering any of the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B. And has a function of discharging the game board 400 from the opening formed on the game board 400. The probability that a game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 is discharged without entering the start winning devices 431A and 431B is, for example, about 1/100, and preferably about 1/1000.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the above-described left middle starting winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10). The entry of the game ball into the predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch (left middle start winning switch 441A) for detecting a game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 431A, and a middle start winning switch (right middle for detecting a game ball entering the right middle start winning device 431B). Start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 for detecting a game ball entering the right starting winning device 432, lower winning switch 443 for detecting a game ball entering the lower winning device 433, and upper winning device 434. An upper winning switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered, a combination switch 445 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the combination operating device 435, a start switch 446 that detects a game ball that has entered the starting device 436, a lower winning combination A non-specific passage switch 447 for detecting a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the device 433; A specific path switch 448 for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown) formed inside the special prize apparatus 433, a general prize switch 449A for detecting a game ball that has entered a general prize apparatus 439A or 439B, 449B and the like are set on the game board 400.

  Further, the gaming board 400 is provided with various sensors for preventing fraud (see FIG. 10), and can detect an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 forms a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area. Game balls of each prize device, specifically, the left middle start prize device 431A, the right middle start prize device 431B, the right start prize device 432, the lower large prize device 433, the upper large prize device 434, and the general prize devices 439A and 439B. The entrance portion of the game device constitutes a winning opening, and the game balls entering each winning opening are guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. The game balls that have not entered each of the winning devices are guided to a collection / discharge passage through a discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection and discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

  Each prize device may be configured separately from other prize devices, or two or more prize devices (for example, a left middle prize device 431A and a right middle prize device, like the middle start prize device 431). The winning device may be constituted by a device in which 431B) is integrated. In addition, the starting device such as the left middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game ball enters, and the game ball is returned to the game area without being paid out. It may be used as the entrance for the ball to be released.

  Each of the general prize device 439A and the general prize device 439B guides the entered game ball to the rear side of the base 401 without changing the probability of the game ball entering them. Although the mid-start winning device 431 does not change the entry probability to the entrance 611, as described above, a part of the game ball that has entered the mid-start winning device 431 is sent to any of the left and right mid-start winning devices 431A and 431B. Is also discharged onto the game board 400 (ie, the game area) without entering (ie, without being guided to the back side of the base 401).

  Further, the right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof. The mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the starting device according to the second special symbol. Instead, or in addition, the starting device according to the first special symbol, the general winning device. 439A, 439B, and one or more of the winning devices such as the middle starting winning device 431 including the starting device according to the first special symbol and the starting device according to the second special symbol. Further, the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid or the like, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operates mechanically.

  The right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 452 for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by a transition between an entry permitted attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and a right entry restriction mechanism. 452 (see FIG. 10). The right entry restriction mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry restriction solenoid 462. When the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition position, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (winning opening). ) Is narrowed (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right starting winning device 432, but when the right approach restricting mechanism 452 is in the approach permitting position, the two movable pieces have their leading ends. By arranging such that the interval between the sets is enlarged, the game ball can enter the right starting winning device 432. The right entry restriction mechanism 452, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”), enters the right entry In accordance with the drive by the regulating solenoid 462, the state is shifted to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the lower large winning device 433 includes a lower entry restriction mechanism 453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the interior by a transition between an entry permitted position and an entry prohibited position, and a lower entry restriction. The lower approach control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guided attitude and the guided attitude cause the game ball that has entered the lower big prize winning device 433 to enter the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distributing mechanism (not shown) for distributing, and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for changing a posture of the distributing mechanism to switch a guide destination of the game ball are provided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry-prohibited position, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower entry device 433. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower large winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guidance posture protruding forward, and is in a guidance posture in which the distribution mechanism is immersed rearward. Is guided to a specific passage. The specific path, the non-specific path, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when the game ball enters the specific path, an advantageous game state is given to the player as a privilege. .

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper winning award device 434 includes an upper entry restriction mechanism 454 that restricts the entry of a game ball into the entrance permitted position and an entry prohibited position by transition between the entry permitted position and the entry prohibited position, and an upper entry restriction. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is in the entry-prohibited position, the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434 because the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening), but the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is not used. Is in the entry allowable posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 opens the entrance, so that the gaming ball can enter the upper-large winning device 434.

  In addition, as the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of a game ball into the inside such as the right entry control mechanism 452, the winning opening (or entrance opening) of each device is constituted by each mechanism. In response to a change in the posture of the operating member that switches between a special state in which the game ball can enter and a normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operating member differs depending on each posture. I just want it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball, such as the right approach restriction mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter to the normal state, and to allow the game ball to enter even in the normal state. In the state, the posture of the operation member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the normal state.

  A game ball can enter the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 when a winning lottery is won. Specifically, the lottery based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the left middle starting winning device 431A related to the first special symbol by the left middle starting winning switch 441A (hereinafter, also referred to as “first special symbol lottery”). , Or based on that the right middle start prize switch 441B or the right start prize switch 442 detects a game ball that has entered the right middle start prize device 431B or the right start prize device 432 according to the second special symbol. When a lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”) is won, at least one of the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distributing mechanism shifts to the guiding posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the shift of the lower approach regulating mechanism 453 to the entry allowable attitude, and further switches after a predetermined time from the shift to the guiding attitude. Returning to the non-guidance posture in response to the stop of the solenoid 465.

  The winning combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the jackpot lottery, either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts operating on the condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes. For this reason, when a big hit is won, the player can start the special game state at a timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to adopt a configuration in which either the lower large prize device 433 or the upper large prize device 434 starts operating on condition that the gaming ball of the combination operating device 435 passes, instead of or In addition, the configuration may be such that either the lower winning device 433 or the upper winning device 434 starts operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 7, the display board 471 to 473 for displaying the symbol change display and the lottery result, and the display apparatuses 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times the game is held are integrated on the gaming board 400, as shown in FIG. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are partitioned in advance into light emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

  Specifically, on the gaming board 400, the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed along with the first special symbol lottery, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 471 relating to a special symbol, and a second symbol for variably displaying the second special symbol in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, or displaying the second special symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 relating to the special symbol, a special symbol reservation display device 476 for displaying the number of hold times of the unit game relating to the first special symbol, and a special symbol hold displaying the number of hold times of the unit game relating to the second special symbol A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are respectively held up to four times. Here, the unit game is one game executed based on one start winning, and is determined based on whether the lottery executed based on one start winning is determined or not, and the lottery is determined based on the winning determination. This refers to a series of games including the start and end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

  When the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the left middle starting winning device 431A is detected by the left middle starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10). Also, the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right middle starting winning device 431B or the right starting winning device 432 is turned to the right middle starting winning switch 441B (FIG. 10) or the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is not added.

  Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (light off, light on, blink) including light emitting colors). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of times of holding by the combination of the light emitting states (off, light, blink) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

  In addition, on the game board 400, a normal symbol display device 473 for changing and displaying a normal symbol or displaying a fixed symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result in accordance with the ordinary symbol lottery, and A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of times the unit game right is held is provided. The right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to four times. If the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the unit game right related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

  The ordinary symbol display device 473 includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Usually, a symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units. In addition, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of times of holding based on a combination of the light emitting states (off, on, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units.

  Also, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner or the decorative symbols are fixedly displayed in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative symbol display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the fixed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variation display of the decorative symbol, more complex and diverse effects are executed than in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and the fixed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol always start changing at exactly the same timing or stop display as the fixed display. It is not necessary to set the timing so that the fluctuation is started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the final display is performed at substantially the same timing.

  Further, the game board 400 includes a board light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board light emitting device 490 is associated with the progress of the game based on control by the sub-control board 940. Various light emission effects and status notification by light emission are executed.

  Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. The normal gaming state (hereinafter also abbreviated as “normal gaming state”) is a state in which the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol have a long variable display time (hereinafter also referred to as “non-time saving state”). Corresponding.

  When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (the internal passage of the lower large winning device 433) during the special game state shifted based on the winning. Depending on whether or not the game state shifts after the special game state. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the variable symbol display time of the normal symbol are shorter than the non-hour reduction state (hereinafter, the "time reduction state"). "), And the winning state of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as" low probability state ") ( In the following, the state shifts to “time reduction gaming state”). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the state is a time saving state, and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state. The game state transitions to a gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as a “high probability state”) (hereinafter, also referred to as a “probable changing gaming state”).

  The time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and thereafter returns to the normal game state. In addition, the probability change game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and thereafter returns to the normal game state.

  The transition between the gaming state and the gaming state is not necessarily required to have the above-described configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to be continued until the next big hit is won, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration further including a gaming state different from each of the above-described gaming states, or a configuration in which a transition between gaming states is performed under a condition different from the above-described conditions.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. On the main control board 920, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, and various fluctuation pattern random numbers relating to a special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated. When the game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 431A, which is the starting device according to the first special symbol, is detected by the left middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10), the first special symbol is started. At the time of the start winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number and a stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are obtained, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state, is not the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the right of the unit game relating to the symbol is not reserved, the processing is started immediately after storing the random numbers. In addition, even when the special game state is not in progress, the unit game pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game right pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. The unit game based on the starting winning prize starts after the unit gaming related to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current prize is completed. When each random number is acquired based on the winning start of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game based on the random number is all of the units held before the current start winning after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

  In addition, the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol is not in the special game state, is not the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and is not the first special symbol and the second special symbol. If the right of the unit game relating to the 2 special symbols is not reserved, the processing is started immediately after storing the random numbers. In addition, even when the special game state is not in progress, the unit game pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game right pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. The unit game based on the starting winning prize starts after the unit gaming related to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current prize is completed. When each random number is acquired based on the winning start of the second special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game based on the random number is all the holdings after the special gaming state and prior to the current winning winning. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

  That is, the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of the start winning. In addition, it is not always necessary to have a configuration in which the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of the starting prize, and one of the special symbols is executed in preference to the other special symbol. For example, a configuration in which a unit game based on a winning start of a second special symbol is executed in preference to a unit game relating to a first special symbol may be adopted. That is, during the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol is a winning start, and if the second special symbol is subsequently a winning, the starting winning is later. The configuration may be such that the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed with priority, or the configuration may be such that the two special symbols are not alternative but can be changed simultaneously.

  If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the winning winning of the first special symbol, a stop symbol (corresponding to the big hit lottery of the first special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number) The type of big hit symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the big hit, for example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times that the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, A plurality of types of big hits are set in accordance with the type of game state such as a game state to be shifted after the special game state (whether or not to shift to the probable change game state), and a big hit symbol is set for each type. If the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol is set as a stop symbol.

  After the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is determined based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of the various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved. The change display time of the symbol is determined, and the change pattern of the decoration symbol is selected. The variation patterns of the decorative symbols are roughly classified into the variation patterns in which the reach display is performed before the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol (the big hit symbol or the lost symbol) related to the first special symbol is definitely displayed. There is also a variation pattern in which the reach symbol is not displayed before the decorative symbol corresponding to the case where the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is the lost symbol is definitely displayed.

  In addition, the “reach display” means that after the variable display of the decorative symbol in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started, the display is first determined and displayed in the left and right display areas of the decorative symbol display device 479. The display result when the remaining decorative symbols for which some of the combinations corresponding to the decorative symbol combinations have a big hit and the variable display is continuously displayed in the central display area is confirmed (that is, This is a display suggesting to the player that there is a possibility of a big hit depending on the stop symbol).

  The reach display includes a normal reach, which is a reach display with a relatively short fluctuation display time (for example, about 25 seconds to about 30 seconds), and a reach display with a fluctuation display time longer than the normal reach (for example, about 60 seconds to about 180 seconds). Super Reach is included. Note that the types of reach display are not limited to the two types of normal reach and super reach, and may be three or more types including special reach, which is a reach display with a variable display time longer than super reach.

  The reach fluctuation pattern is provided for each type of reach display such as normal reach and super reach. Note that only one type of normal reach may be set, or a plurality of types having different variable display times may be set. When a plurality of types of normal reach are set, a reach variation pattern is provided for each type of normal reach. Similarly, only one type of super reach may be set, or a plurality of types having different variable display times may be set. When a plurality of types of super reach are set, a reach variation pattern is provided for each type of super reach.

  After the change display time of the first special symbol is determined and the change pattern of the decoration symbol is selected, the change display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the decoration on the decoration symbol display device 479 are performed. The variable display (fluctuation effect) of the symbol is started, the variable display is continued in a fixed pattern over the variable display time for the first special symbol, and the variable pattern is displayed over the variable display time for the decorative symbol. Is displayed continuously. Thereafter, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is definitely displayed, and a symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is definitely displayed as a decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined time.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the first special symbol is determined and displayed. In the special gaming state, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the upper large winning device 434 are in the entry permissible attitude a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 443 and 444 during the permissible postures of the lower and upper entry restriction mechanisms 453 and 454, or a predetermined maximum number, When the permissible entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after the elapse of a predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry permission posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of big hit.

  Only one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is configured to take an entry allowable attitude during the special game state, and after a predetermined standby time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) One) shifts to the first approach allowable posture in ()). In addition, the special game state ends when a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the final entry prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time elapses thereafter (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state.

  In various game states, a game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 431B or the right start winning device 432, which is the start device according to the second special symbol, is the right middle start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10) or the right start winning switch. When detected by 442 (see FIG. 10), the second special symbol is a winning start. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control of the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is obtained, and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decoration symbol, the execution of the variation display, and the transition control of the game state are executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol. Is done.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, a winning random number related to a normal symbol is obtained unless the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol is not being performed, the unit game relating to the acquired ordinary symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol is being performed, the unit game relating to the acquired ordinary symbol is started after the completion of the unit game based on the acquired unit game right relating to the ordinary symbol.

  In a unit game related to a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not a winning has been made based on the value of a winning random number. When the winning is made, a predetermined winning symbol is set as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when no winning is made in the ordinary symbol lottery, a predetermined lost symbol is set as a stopped symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-hour reduction state, the fluctuation display in a fixed pattern is continued for a predetermined fluctuation display time, and in the time reduction state. The variable display in a fixed pattern is continued for a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With a lapse of a predetermined time according to the gaming state, a stop symbol related to a normal symbol is fixedly displayed over a certain period of time.

  When the stop symbol related to the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the right entry restricting mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry allowable attitude at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in a case of winning in the non-time-saving state (the normal game state and the special game state), the right start winning device 432 permits the entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 second). When the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state, the predetermined maximum allowable time is longer (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to enter the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right starting winning switch 442, the right approach restricting mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibiting posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum allowable time. In addition, even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right starting winning device 432 in the unit game relating to the current ordinary symbol ends.

  Next, a configuration related to playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In order to receive a second special symbol lottery based on a start winning in the right starting winning device 432 (hereinafter, this lottery may be referred to as a "right special symbol lottery"), first, a normal symbol lottery must be won. In addition, the game ball must enter the right-start winning device 432 in a state where the right-start winning device 432 is allowed to enter based on the winning. The winning probability for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry-permitted state of the right starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the time saving state, so that in the normal gaming state, the right time special symbol lottery opportunity per unit time is A first special symbol lottery and a second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, these lotteries may be referred to as “central side special symbol lottery”) based on the start winning in the middle start winning device 431 per unit time. Opportunities are significantly smaller. Conversely, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving game state or a probable game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the right side special symbol lottery is made much larger than the opportunity per unit time to receive the center side special symbol lottery. ing.

  Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the center side special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, plays a game aiming at the transition to the certain change game state by causing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the right special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

  Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 at the center of the game area in which the game ball flows down, and a game technique for causing the game ball to flow mainly from the left side of the central structure 420 (left-handed game ) And a game technique (a right-handed game technique) in which game balls flow down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420. In the normal gaming state, the player plays a game by a left-handed gaming technique, and in the time-saving gaming state and the probable changing gaming state, plays a game by a right-handed gaming technique. In addition, since the lower big winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, even in the special gaming state, the game is performed by the right-handed gaming method.

  Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching another member or device to the base 501. The base 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported on the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

  The rear block 104 is a game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing game balls, and rectifies (for example, in one row) game balls continuously on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and aligns them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball aligning portion, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a payout of game balls on a downstream side of the case rail 530, A payout device 540 for renting out game balls, and guidance as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing out of the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls payout of game balls by the payout device 540 and lending of game balls, and an external power source. The function as a power supply means for converting the power into a predetermined voltage required by the kind of device or the like and outputting the same and controlling the ejection of game balls based on the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. A power supply / launch control device 570 having a function as a launch control means, a payout control device 560, a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1), and a card unit (not shown) arranged beside the pachinko machine 100 And a relay device 950 that relays a signal between the two.

  The base 501 is integrally formed of a resin (for example, an ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to a front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as an attached portion to be attached.

  The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. The protective cover portion 503 does not cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the rear surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected and checked, such as a part of the main control device 370, is provided on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 100. The size is set so as to form a window for exposing to the window. A large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving the heat dissipation of the heat generated by the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed on the back surface of the protective cover portion 503.

  The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container opened upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island equipment are sequentially supplied to one end in the longitudinal direction. An opening (not shown) is formed at one end of the game ball tank 510 in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game balls are supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. In addition, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . In addition, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap therewith, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

  The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 that forms a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width through which the game balls pass in a line, and a height gradually increasing as an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. And a rectifying member 522 for rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage having a top surface portion whose height is lowered from a vertically overlapped height to a one-stage height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

  The case rail 530 is formed to be vertically long so as to be continuous below the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows in. On the case rail 530, the game ball is curved left and right so as not to flow vigorously and continues downward. In addition, a ball break detector 539 for detecting a ball break is provided in a middle part of the ball path in the case rail 530. A stored ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) is built in the ball cut detector 539, and the stored ball switch 591 causes a ball to be clogged on the case rail 530 or on the upstream side of the case rail 530, and a game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects out-of-ball conditions that have not been properly replenished.

  The payout device 540 includes a sending mechanism for sending out game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the sending mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. Passing of the released game balls through the ball path is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of paid out game balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / fire control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. Have been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / fire control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

  The dispensing control device 560 includes a dispensing control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that accommodates the dispensing control board 930. The dispensing control board 930, like the main control board 920, leaves no trace of opening. It is housed inside a board case sealed so as not to be opened.

  The power / emission control device 570 includes a power / emission control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power / emission control board 900. The power / emission control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. Is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

  The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each unit of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device in response to operation of the launch operation device 250. A firing control unit 902 for controlling the driving of the 330 and a signal relay unit 903 for relaying an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 are provided.

  The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various powers from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is power of a driving voltage (for example, 12 VDC) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. (For example, DC 5 volts), backup power for retaining the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

  The power supply unit 901 supplies various types of power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power of the internal power, the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. The power of the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. The payout control board 930 is supplied with power of a driving voltage and a control voltage. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with power of the driving voltage and the control voltage. The power of the driving voltage and the power of the control voltage are supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

  A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in an off state, taking in of external power is stopped. The power switch 909 is turned off or a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 is pulled out of an external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of power to the inside of the device 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

  The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after shifting to the power failure state. Accordingly, the main control board 920 can save the state so as to return to the current control state and end the control.

  The firing control unit 902 controls the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the firing device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The operation of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 is permitted when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping firing is provided. The firing control unit 902 outputs an on-state firing permission signal to the main control board 920 on condition that the operation is not performed. The main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the ON state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the ON state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let it. As a result, game balls are sequentially fired from the firing device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252).

  The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to receiving the ON-state initialization signal. Note that the initialization switch 907 does not necessarily need to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. The configuration may be such that the initialization switch 907 is accommodated in the board case 371, so that an illegal signal input aimed at a section where a signal is transmitted can be suppressed.

  Also, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the low-speed payout signal outputs the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. (Payout speed of the game balls from the device 540). The main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the high-speed payout signal controls the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

  The power supply monitoring board 910 monitors a power supply state from the power supply / emission control board 900, and supplies power and transmits various signals between the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state. If the state in which the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and an on-state power failure signal is output to main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the shift to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

  The main control board 920 controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100 as a whole. An MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 920. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily executed when executing the control programs. And the like (not shown) for storing the same. On the main control board 920, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmitting / receiving circuit (not shown) are mounted. I have. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) even after shifting to the power failure state by supplying power of the backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900.

  The payout control board 930 controls the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the lending operation of the game balls by the payout device 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending device 290. Like the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. (Not shown), various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmitting / receiving circuit (not shown) are mounted.

  The payout control board 930 is provided with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting information communication with another device, and for example, bidirectional information input / output communication with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 is possible. Are connected to the open / close detection switches 108 and 109, the storage ball switch 591 and the payout counting switch 592 so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is connected. Note that the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function to maintain internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920 Unlike this, a configuration in which internal data is not maintained in a power failure state may be adopted.

  The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, and the like, based on instructions from the main control substrate 920. The sub-control board 940 is provided with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting information communication with another device. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , And the input operation device 260 are connected so that information can be communicated in both directions, and the decorative symbol display device 479 and the like are connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 is roughly divided into a main processing started upon recovery from a power failure state and a main processing that is interrupted periodically (in the present embodiment at a period of 2 ms (milliseconds)). Timer interrupt processing.

  First, a main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 11).

  In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initialization processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) and the big hit symbol random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol, and the normal symbol The random number initial value update processing S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (part of the area of the RAM) and the first variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), variation pattern, and the like Variation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the fourth variation type counter (part of the RAM), and interrupts are permitted. And write permission process S1023 is repeatedly executed. When a timer interrupt request is generated before the interrupt permission processing S1023, the timer interrupt processing is executed immediately after the interrupt permission processing S1023.

  In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (a partial area of the RAM) for controlling execution of a program, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and a payout control board A start-up standby process S1003 of waiting for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up is executed.

  After the start-up standby process S1003, a process S1004 for determining the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power / emission control board 900, a process S1005 for determining the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM), and saving An information storage state determination process S1007 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the storage information in the RAM is to be deleted based on the determination results. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that has been updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and The value of a counter related to the unit game in the middle, the value of the counter stored by the winning start, and the like are exemplified.

  The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) in accordance with the transition to the previous power failure state. ), It is determined whether or not the exclusive OR of the checksum value and the RAM determination value, which is a two's complement, is “0” (determination processing S1007). It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

  When the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), when the power outage information is not the predetermined power outage value indicating that the storage information is saved and terminated at the time of transition to the power outage state (S1005: N), or the storage is performed. If the information is not normally stored (S1007: N), a RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the information stored in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed, the hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 A ware initialization process S1009 is executed.

  After the hardware initialization processing S1009, a processing S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is performed. If the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the held information and a return command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the return of the held information in the RAM return setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 returns to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

  On the other hand, if the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized without restoring the held information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. Is performed (initialization command output processing S1014).

  In the RAM return setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power outage information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power outage value, and various error states such as a fraud detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power outage state. Even if the error has occurred, all of those error states are released. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command. A predetermined initialization process is also performed in each of.

  After the initialization of the RAM according to the situation at the time of start-up (determination processing S1004 to initialization command output processing S1014), if the condition device was activated at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparation for returning is performed (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation processing S1015, the operation states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and processing corresponding to the state of the game at the time of the power outage state is executed on the sub control board 940. You.

  After the special game state return preparation processing S1015, it is determined whether or not the time reduction state flag is set to determine whether the state is the time reduction state or the non-time reduction state (determination processing S1016), and the state is the time reduction state. In this case (S1016: Y), a time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), a non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output processing S1018). Thereafter, the value of the winning random number counter (part of the RAM) relating to the special symbol is initialized (random number initialization processing S1019).

  Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

  In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than the timer interrupt are prohibited. Thereafter, a power outage monitoring process S1202 to an external information output process S1221 relating to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various kinds of injustices (S1207: Y), the control signal output processing S1208 to the external information output processing S1221 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be described individually.

  In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected all three times, it is determined that the power failure state is present. If it is not determined in this determination that a power failure has occurred, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that the power is out, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. In addition, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and a two's complement of the checksum value is set as a RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which substantial control such as progress of the game and monitoring of various sensors is not performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. You. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

  In the random number updating process S1203, the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. If the value of the winning random number counter according to the above is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). However, if the value after the change is the same value as the cyclic initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. , And the cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

  The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the ordinary symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter for the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and a plurality of counters are updated asynchronously. Refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter for the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol have the same value range, and the big hit symbol random number counter and the big hit symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The value range of the winning random number counter related to the ordinary symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol are the same.

  In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter for the ordinary symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and If the value of the winning random number initial value counter for the symbol is the specified maximum value, the value is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter for special symbols and the random number initial value counter for ordinary symbols, the random number initial value counter for special symbols is the same except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

  In the variation counter updating process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), the variation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “187”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the first variation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). The second to fourth variation type counters are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. Is done.

  In addition, each winning random number counter, big hit symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, and each variation type counter relating to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol need not necessarily have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter is another configuration. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a fixed initial value is updated without using an initial value counter, or a configuration in which a random number generation IC is used without using a program and a value is referred to as necessary. .

  In the game stop determination processing S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, the information is updated to the game stop value, and various information for stopping the progress of the game is set. On the other hand, when the fraud detection information is not the fraud detection value or is already the game stop value, the game stop determination processing S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when various frauds are detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. In the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped based on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

  In the control signal output processing S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 for the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 for the second special symbol, and the normal symbol display device 472 A signal for controlling various notification devices such as the symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approaching solenoid 462, a lower approaching solenoid 463, an upward approaching solenoid 464, a switching solenoid 465, etc. A control signal is output.

  In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switches 441A and 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower large winning switch 443, the upper large winning switch 444, the combination operating switch 445, the start switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, and the specific The signal state from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B is read, and a change in the detection state of the game ball by various switches is detected.

  Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read twice into the input buffer (a part of the RAM) at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. Each time, a signal state read first (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and a signal state read second (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) Based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”), a change in the detection state of various switches is detected. Then, when the previous detection state is the OFF state, the first signal state is the ON state, and when the second signal state is the ON state, it is determined that each switch has transitioned to the ON state. Then, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power outage monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, since each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, immediately after the power supply is stopped, various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

  In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas in the RAM) used for displaying a special symbol and a normal symbol in a variable manner, controlling each game state, and monitoring impropriety are updated.

  In the fraud detection process S1211, a fraudulent act of forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices is detected. Specifically, the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 are forcibly moved to the allowable entry position, and the game ball is guided to a specific passage of the lower winning device 433 by vibrating. , Induction of compulsory malfunction of the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 by radio waves, guiding game balls to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, a left middle starting winning device 431A, Occurrence of a situation in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act such as guiding a game ball to the right middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 at abnormal timing has been performed. Is detected.

  In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on detection of a game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the left middle starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the right middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). , The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. When the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. In addition, when the lower special winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower special winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the upper special winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10). If the upper winning switch detection flag is set on the basis of this, the big winning counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

  In the launch control processing S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

  In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is set to the intermediate block. It is detected whether 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed. Also, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is compared with the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is closed or not.

  In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. Note that the sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left sound device 281, the upper right sound device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

  In the payout signal output processing S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. Note that the first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by one each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and decremented by one each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. Each time the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number (for example, three) of game balls corresponding to the winning (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed), the main control board 920 receives a prize. In a situation where a ball command is requested and payout of prize balls continues, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a winning (for example, 13) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and outputs a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter to a payout control board. When 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, the control of holding the right of the unit game according to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game according to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the holding control of the unit game right related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol holding display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower large winning device. The operation control of the 433 and the upper winning device 434 is further executed.

  In addition, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol, each piece of information for causing the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol is selected. For example, in the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 includes the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and the various variation pattern random numbers. The value is selected based on the value and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, control for holding the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol and control for the unit game relating to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the holding control of the unit game right related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol holding display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is executed, and when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower large winning device. The operation control of the 433 and the upper winning device 434 is further executed.

  In addition, in the unit game relating to the second special symbol, each piece of information for causing the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol is selected. For example, in the unit game relating to the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 includes the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and the variation pattern random number. The value is selected based on the value and the number of times the unit game right related to the second special symbol is held.

  In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol are executed. Specifically, in the holding control of the right of the unit game relating to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol holding display device 478 is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol, the operation control of the ordinary symbol display device 473 relating to the ordinary symbol is executed, and when the ordinary symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. .

  In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, and Based on various kinds of information updated to control the operation of the special symbol reservation display device 477 and the like relating to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  Further, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to each information for causing the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the variation display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol selected in the special symbol related process S1217 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub-control board 940 in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the command received from the main control board 920.

  In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Suggested effects that appear in the variable display of decorative patterns>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 or the special symbol display device 472 is a predetermined reach display (for example, In the case of a mode including (super reach), a predetermined suggestive effect can be made to appear by pressing the pressing operation device 261.

  With reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 16, a description will be given of a suggested effect that appears in the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 13 is a time chart for explaining the time when the suggested effect appears in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 13, as an example of the variable display in which the suggested effect can appear, a variable display including a super reach in which the variable display time is 90 seconds is illustrated. 14 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing screen transitions of the decorative symbol display device 479 along the time chart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, at time ts, when the decorative symbol display synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 479, each symbol constituting the decorative symbol is started. Starts scrolling. The display data constituting the variable display of the decorative symbol is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940 in association with each of the fluctuation pattern commands that the sub control board 940 can receive from the main control board 920. Have been.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbols include a symbol in a left column (hereinafter also referred to as a “left symbol”), a symbol in a right column (hereinafter also referred to as a “right symbol”), and a left symbol. It is composed of three rows of symbols with a symbol between the right symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a "medium symbol"). In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, it is assumed that the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol have started the variable display of the decorative symbol stopped at “6”, “5”, and “3”, respectively.

  After a predetermined time (for example, after 4 seconds) from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol at time ts, the first operable period is started (time t1). The first operable period started at time t1 ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start (time t2). The first operable period from time t1 to time t2 is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261. The time t2 does not necessarily need to be a predetermined time after the start of the first operable period, and the first operable period ends at the timing when the player performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261. The display corresponding to the operation may be performed.Even in the other operable periods described below, each operable period ends at the timing of performing the push operation, and the display of the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. You may start.

  When the first operable period starts at time t1, as shown in FIG. 14, the decorative symbol display device 479 that variably displays the decorative symbols indicates that the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is possible. Is displayed, and a character 602 of "enemy has come!" Is displayed as a comment on the effect that prompts a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  Each display data relating to the display of the image 601 and the characters 602 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and the start time of the first operable period (that is, the time) is controlled by the sub-control board 940. At t1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, and is deleted at the end of the period (that is, at time t2).

In the case where the player has not performed the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period, as shown in FIG. 13, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol at the time ts At the timing of (after), the left symbol of the decorative symbols during the variable display is stopped (time t4).
On the other hand, when the player performs the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period, when the first operable period ends at time t2, the first special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is started. . As the first special effect, as shown in FIG. 14, three types of a pattern 1A, a pattern 1B, and a pattern 1C are prepared, and a first pattern of one of the three types selected from the three types is prepared. The special effect is started at time t2 by the control of the sub-control board 940.

  The pattern 1A is a pattern that includes a character 611A “A military has arrived!” And a red frame (red frame) 612A surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. The pattern 1B is a pattern including a character 611B of “A thief has come!” And a yellow frame (yellow frame) 612B surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. The pattern 1C is a pattern including a character 611C of “Cat came!” And a blue frame (blue frame) 612C surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. Each display data relating to the display of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940. It is not necessary to set the combination of the character and the frame to be the same each time, and the character and the frame may be selected by lottery.

  A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as a “first special effect lottery”) for selecting one of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C as the first special effect is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the first special effect lottery, the sub-control board 940 acquires the value of the first special effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940, and performs the first special effect. This is performed by referring to the first special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

  The first special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and at the update timing, the value of the counter is a value different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”). In this case, the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and when the value of the counter is a specified maximum value, the value is changed to a specified minimum value (“0”).

  The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the pattern of the first special effect by the first special effect lottery is determined by receiving from the main control board 920 a changing pattern command corresponding to the changing display of the decorative symbol currently being executed by the sub-control board 940. May be the timing at which the first operable period starts or ends.

  The first special effect selection table includes a first hit table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display. A first out-of-office table which is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery is prepared.

  The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) in the first hit time table and the first off time table is determined by the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being executed (ie, (Variable display including reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when a lottery is not selected in each special symbol lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 1A appears, after the decoration symbol currently displayed in the variable display is definitely displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decoration symbol currently displayed in the variable display is displayed). Is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special game state (after the final display), and when the pattern 1C appears, the transition to the special game state is performed after the decorative pattern currently displayed in the variable display is finally displayed. Is set to be the least likely to happen.

  Therefore, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. That is, when the player sees the character 611A of “XX Army!” Included in the pattern 1A, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the “cat” included in the pattern 1C. Has come! ", The degree of expectation for the special game state is minimized.

  Similarly, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern. That is, when the player sees the pattern 1A in which the frame 612A is red, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, and when the player sees the pattern 1C in which the frame 612C is blue, the player has the special game state. The lowest expectations for

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the first hit time table, the selection probability of the pattern 1A is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 1B is the second highest (for example, 20%), and the pattern 1C Is set to be the lowest (for example, 10%). On the other hand, in the first off-state table, the selection probability of the pattern 1C is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 1B is the second highest (for example, 20%), and the selection probability of the pattern 1A is the lowest. (For example, 10%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the first special effect ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) after the first special effect starts (time t3). Note that the first special effect (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) is displayed on a layer in front of the variation display of the currently executed decorative symbol, so that the first special effect is executed at time t3. The variable display of the decoration pattern inside appears again. Thereafter, the left symbol stops at time t4.

  After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the left symbol stops at time t4, the second operable period is started during the low-speed fluctuation (scroll) before the right symbol stops (time t5). The first operable period started at time t5 ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start (time t6). The second operable period from the time t5 to the time t6 is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  When the second operable period starts at time t5, as shown in FIG. 15, the decorative symbol display device 479 includes an image 603 that reminds the player that a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is possible. Is displayed. Display data relating to the display of the image 603 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and is decorated at the start time of the second operable period (that is, time t5) by the control of the sub control board 940. It is displayed on the symbol display device 479, and is deleted at the end of the period (that is, at time t6).

  In the case where the player has not performed the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, as shown in FIG. 13, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started at time ts At the timing of (after), the right symbol performing the low-speed scroll (low-speed fluctuation) is stopped so as to be the reach display (time t7). For example, in a configuration in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fixedly stopped at the same symbol when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. If the right symbol stops at "7" at time t7 when the vehicle stops at "7", the reach display is generated.

  On the other hand, when the player performs the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, when the second operable period ends at time t6, the second special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is displayed on the sub-control board. It is started by the control of 940. As the second special effect, as shown in FIG. 15, four types of a pattern 2A, a pattern 2B, a pattern 2C, and a pattern 2D are prepared, and one of these four types is selected. The second special effect of the pattern is started at time t6.

  The pattern 2D is a pattern in which the right symbol that scrolls at a low speed is stopped so as to be the reach display, as in the case where the player does not perform the pushing operation on the pushing operation device 261 during the second operable period.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the pattern 2C temporarily stops so that the right symbol scrolling at a low speed becomes the reach display and then starts moving again (display Q1), and is shifted by one from “7” where the right symbol becomes the reach display. Stop at "8" (display Q2), the middle symbol is short and stops temporarily (display Q3). When a series of displays Q including these displays Q1 to Q3 is displayed, the symbols in the left and right three columns are scrolled again. The symbols in each row to be re-scrolled stop after the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol stops after low-speed scrolling to reach the reach display. That is, the pattern 2 </ b> C is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if pseudo display is performed twice.

  The pattern 2B is the same as the pattern 2C up to the portion where the right symbol scrolls at a low speed in the re-scrolled three columns of symbols. In the pattern 2B, after a series of display Q is performed again thereafter, the symbols in the left and right three columns start re-scrolling for the second time. The symbols in each row where the second re-scrolling is started stop after the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at the time t4, and then the right symbol stops so as to reach the reach display through the low-speed scroll. That is, the pattern 2B is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if pseudo display was performed three times.

  The pattern 2A is the same as the pattern 2B up to the portion where the right symbol scrolls at a low speed in the second re-scroll. In the pattern 2A, after a series of display Q is performed again thereafter, the symbols in the left and right three columns start the third re-scroll. The symbols in each row where the third re-scrolling is started stop after the left symbol stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol stops to reach display through low-speed scrolling. That is, the pattern 2A is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display were performed four times in a simulated manner.

  Further, among the second special effects, for the patterns (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) for performing the continuous effect, frames of each color surrounding the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 appear during the effect. For example, in the pattern 2C, as shown in FIG. 15, a blue frame 613C appears in a display Q3 constituting a series of displays Q (that is, a display in which a middle symbol is short and temporarily stopped).

  On the other hand, in the pattern 2B, a blue frame 613B1 appears in the display Q3 forming the first series of displays Q, and a yellow frame appears in the display Q3 forming the second series of displays Q. I do. That is, different colored frames appear in the series of displays Q performed for the first time and in the series of displays Q performed for the second time.

  In the pattern 2A, a blue frame 613A1 appears in the display Q3 forming the first series of displays Q, and a yellow frame appears in the display Q3 forming the second series of displays Q. A red frame appears in the display Q3 constituting a series of displays Q performed for the third time. That is, different colored frames appear in the series of displays Q performed for the first time, the series of displays Q performed for the second time, and the series of displays Q performed for the third time. In the pattern 2A, a rainbow (rainbow) frame may appear before the right symbol stops after the third re-scroll, and in this case, the variable display indicates that the big hit has been won. Correspondingly, it is set to always transition to the special game state after the fluctuation display.

  Each display data relating to the above-described pattern 2A, pattern 2B, and pattern 2C display is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. As for the pattern 2D, the display data constituting the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is diverted.

  The lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “second special effect lottery”) as to which of the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, the pattern 2C, and the pattern 2D is selected as the second special effect is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the second special effect lottery, the sub-control board 940 acquires the value of the second special effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940, and This is performed by referring to the second special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

  The second special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds). When the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, Is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). It should be noted that a configuration common to the above-described first special effect selection counter may be used as the second special effect selection counter.

  The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the pattern of the second special effect by the second special effect lottery is determined by receiving from the main control board 920 a variable pattern command corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed by the sub-control board 940. May be the timing at which the second operable period starts or ends.

  The second special effect selection table includes a second hit time table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol change display. A second out-of-office table which is referred to when a big hit is not won in the lottery is prepared.

  The selection probabilities of the patterns (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, and pattern 2D) in the second hit table and the second miss table are determined by the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being executed. (I.e., the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when a lottery is not selected in each special symbol lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 2A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is definitely displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is displayed). Is set so as to have the highest possibility of transition to the special game state (after the final display), and when the pattern 2D appears, the transition to the special game state is performed after the decorative pattern currently displayed in the variable display is finally displayed. Is set to be the least likely to happen. Further, the pattern 2B and the pattern 2C are set so that the possibility is the second and third highest, respectively.

  Therefore, when the pattern 2A for performing a continuous effect as if the variable display is performed four times in a pseudo manner appears as the second special effect, the player maximizes the degree of expectation for the special game state, In the case where the pattern 2D which becomes the reach display without performing the continuous effect appears even though the pressing operation device 261 is operated, the player has the lowest expectation.

  In the second special effect, in the patterns 2A, 2B, and 2C for performing the continuous effect, the frames (the frames 613C, 613B1, and 613A1 and the like) surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 are provided. ) Appears. The number of times the color of the frame changes in each pattern is performed four times in the pattern 2A, twice in the pattern 2B, and once in the pattern 2C. Therefore, each time the color of the frame changes, Improve the degree of expectation for a special game state.

  Further, the change in the color of the frame in the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, and the pattern 2C may cause a transition to the special game state, similarly to the patterns (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) constituting the first special effect. It is configured to change in the order of blue → yellow → red as the height increases. That is, in the second special effect, the order of change in the color of the frame in each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) for performing the continuous effect has a certain regularity with the possibility of transition to the special game state. It is configured to be. Therefore, as the color of the frame sequentially changes along the regularity, the player multiplies the expectation for the special game state in a synergistic manner.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the second hit table, the selection probability of the pattern 2A is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 2B is the second highest (for example, 30%), and the pattern 2C Is set to be the third highest (for example, 8%) and the selection probability of the pattern 2D is the lowest (for example, 2%). On the other hand, in the second miss table, the selection probability of the pattern 2D is the highest (for example, 70%), the selection probability of the pattern 2C is the second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of the pattern 2B is the third. It is set so as to be high (for example, 10%) and to have the lowest selection probability of the pattern 2A (for example, 2%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the second special effect ends when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the second special effect, by stopping the right symbol to reach display (time t10). In FIG. 13, only one time is illustrated as time t10, which is the end time of the second special effect. However, the execution time of the second special effect is different for each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2C, 2D), four times corresponding to each pattern of the second special effect can be time t10.

  For example, in the pattern 2D, the time t7, which is the stop time of the right symbol when the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, is the time t10. On the other hand, in the pattern 2A, for example, the timing 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol at time ts is time t10. In the pattern 2B and the pattern 2C, for example, the timing 40 seconds and 50 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol at the time ts is the time t10.

  Note that the execution time of the second special effect may correspond to the variable display time selected in advance. For example, re-scroll may be performed for each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, and pattern 2D). The variable display having a longer variable display time may be selected as the number of times is larger, and the pattern may be determined by determining the number of re-scrolls by determining the variable display time by the main control board 920. . In addition, the length of the effect (battle effect) executed after the right symbol stops is made different, and the timing of the right symbol stop in the first and second and subsequent times in each pattern coincides, and a different length corresponding to each pattern. It is good also as composition which performs the production of the effect.

  If the right symbol stops in the reach display at time t7 or time t10 after the end of the second special effect, the third operable period starts. The third operable period ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start (time t8 or time t11). The third operable period is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  When the third operable period is started due to the stop of the right symbol in the reach display, as shown in FIG. 16, the decorative symbol display device 479 informs the player that the pressing operation with respect to the pressing operation device 261 is possible. An image 605 reminding the user and a character 606 of “recruiting helpers!” Are displayed as a comment on the effect that prompts a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  Each display data relating to the display of the image 605 and the characters 606 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and the decorative symbol is displayed at the start of the third operable period under the control of the sub-control board 940. Displayed on device 479 and erased at the end of the period.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the third operable period started at time t7 ends at time t8, regardless of whether the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period. A battle effect, which is one of the suggestion effects, is started by the control of the sub-control board 940. Similarly, when the third operable period started at time t10 ends at time t11, regardless of whether the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period. The battle effect is started by the control of the sub-control board 940.

  The battle effect is a video effect in which a character that is regarded as an enemy, such as an army, a thief, or a cat, is battled until the middle symbol finally stops. As the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 16, four types of patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D are prepared, and one pattern selected from these four types is prepared. The battle effect is started at time t8 or time t11.

  The pattern 4A is a pattern representing a situation in which the opponent is fighting in an overwhelmingly priority situation. The pattern 4B is a pattern showing a situation where the enemy is fighting in a priority situation. The pattern 4C is a pattern showing a situation where the enemy is fighting in an inferior situation. The pattern 4D is a pattern showing a situation in which the enemy is fighting in an overwhelmingly inferior situation.

  Each display data relating to the display of the pattern 4A, the pattern 4B, the pattern 4C, and the pattern 4D is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. Each of these patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, 4D may have a configuration in which only display data corresponding to a video production indicating the situation of each battle is prepared, or may appear in the first special production. A configuration may be provided in which display data corresponding to a plurality of types of video effects indicating a battle situation is prepared for each type of enemy.

  Each of the patterns 4A, 4B, and 4C is a pattern of a long effect time used when the right symbol stops at time t7 (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is not pressed at the second operation time). And a short effect time pattern used when the operation is stopped at time t10 after the end of the second special effect (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is pressed at the second operation time). On the other hand, for pattern 4D, the time at which the right symbol stops is the same regardless of whether the second special effect has been performed (that is, whether the pressing operation device 261 has been pressed at the second operation time). Therefore, one effect time pattern that is common to the case where the pressing operation device 261 is pressed and the case where the pressing operation device 261 is not pressed during the second operation time is prepared.

  The lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “battle effect lottery”) for selecting any of the pattern 4A, the pattern 4B, the pattern 4C, and the pattern 4D as the battle effect is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the battle effect lottery, the sub-control board 940 acquires the value of the battle effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940, and obtains the value of the battle effect selection counter. This is performed by referring to the battle effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940.

  The battle effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds). At the update timing, if the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”), The value is changed to a value larger than the current value by “1”, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, the counter is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). It should be noted that a configuration common to at least one of the first special effect selection counter or the second special effect selection counter described above may be used as the battle effect selection counter.

  The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the battle effect pattern by the battle effect lottery is the timing at which the sub-control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the currently-displayed variation display of the decorative symbol. Or the timing at which the third operable period starts or ends.

  As the battle effect selection table, a fourth hit time table referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display, A fourth out-of-office table which is referred to when a big hit is not won in the lottery is prepared.

  The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 4A, pattern 4B, pattern 4C, pattern 4D) in the fourth hit table and the fourth miss table is determined by the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being executed. (I.e., the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when a lottery is not selected in each special symbol lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 4 </ b> A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is definitely displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in the variable display is displayed). Is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special game state (after the final display), and when the pattern 4D appears, the transition to the special game state is performed after the decoration pattern currently displayed in the variable display is finally displayed. Is set to be the least likely to happen. The pattern 4B and the pattern 4C are set such that the likelihood is the second and third highest, respectively.

  Therefore, when a pattern 4A for performing a video production showing a situation in which a battle is overwhelmingly given priority to an enemy appears as a battle performance, the player maximizes the expectation for the special game state. Then, when a pattern 4D for performing a video effect showing a state of fighting in an overwhelmingly inferior situation with respect to the enemy appears, the player has the lowest expectation.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the fourth hit table, the selection probability of the pattern 4A is the highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 4B is the second highest (for example, 15%), and the pattern 4C Is set to have the third highest selection probability (for example, 5%) and the lowest selection probability for pattern 4D (for example, 0%). On the other hand, in the fourth miss table, the selection probability of the pattern 4D is the highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 4C is the second highest (for example, 15%), and the selection probability of the pattern 4B is the third. It is set so as to be high (for example, 4%) and to have the lowest selection probability of the pattern 4A (for example, 1%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the battle effect started at time t8 or time t11 is a timing after a predetermined time (90 seconds after in the example shown in FIG. 13) from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol at time ts. Then, the process ends when the middle symbol finally stops (that is, the decorative symbol is definitely displayed) with the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery (time te).

  In the configuration where the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are fixedly stopped with the same symbol when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, both the left symbol and the right symbol stop at "7" In this case, if the first or second special symbol lottery has won a big hit, the middle symbol finally stops at "7" at time te. On the other hand, if the first or second special symbol lottery has not won the big hit, the middle symbol finally stops at a symbol other than “7” (for example, “8”) at time te. Immediately before or at the same time as the stop, the result of the battle effect is also displayed. If the first or second special symbol lottery is won at the jackpot, an image in which the ally character wins is displayed. An image is displayed in which the enemy character wins and the ally loses.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the player performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t7, when the third operable period ends at time t8, the suggested effect 1 The third special effect is started by the control of the sub-control board 940. Similarly, when the player performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10, the third special effect is started when the third operable period ends at time t11. You.

  As the third special effect, as shown in FIG. 16, three types of a pattern 3A, a pattern 3B, and a pattern 3C are prepared, and the third pattern of one pattern selected from these three types is prepared. The special effect starts at time t8. As described above, at time t8 or time t11, the battle effect is also started. However, since the third special effect is displayed on a layer in front of the battle effect, the player is required to perform the third special effect. Until the end, the third special effect will be seen on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  The pattern 3A is a pattern including a character 614A of “XX! Has arrived!” And a red frame 615A surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. The pattern 3B is a pattern including a character 614B of “A fighter has come!” And a yellow frame 615B surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. The pattern 3C is a pattern including a character 614C of “Dog came!” And a blue frame 615C surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. Each display data relating to the display of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, and the pattern 3C is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940.

  A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as a “third special effect lottery”) for selecting one of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, and the pattern 3C as the first special effect is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the third special effect lottery, the sub-control board 940 acquires the value of the third special effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940, and This is performed by referring to the third special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

  The third special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds). When the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, Is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). It should be noted that a counter shared with at least one of the first special effect selection counter, the second special effect selection counter, or the battle effect selection counter described above may be used as the third special effect selection counter.

  The timing at which the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the third special effect by the third special effect lottery is determined by receiving from the main control board 920 a variable pattern command corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed by the sub control board 940. May be the timing at which the third operable period starts or ends.

  The third special effect selection table includes a third hit time table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently being executed. And a third out-of-office table which is referred to when the jackpot is not won in the lottery.

  The selection probabilities of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) in the third hit table and the third miss table are determined by the winning probability in each special symbol lottery and the variation display of the decoration symbol currently being executed (ie, (Variable display including reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when a lottery is not selected in each special symbol lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 3A appears, after the decoration symbol currently displayed in the variable display is definitely displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decoration symbol currently displayed in the variable display is displayed). Is set to have the highest possibility of transition to the special game state (after the final display), and when the pattern 3C appears, the transition to the special game state is performed after the decorative pattern currently displayed in the variable display is finally displayed. Is set to be the least likely to happen.

  Therefore, when the third special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. In other words, when the player sees the character 614A of “XX! Man has come!” Included in the pattern 3A, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while the “3. When the character 614C of "Dog came!" Is seen, the degree of expectation for the special game state is minimized.

  Similarly, when the third special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern. In other words, the player maximizes the expectation for the special game state when viewing the pattern 3A in which the frame 615A is red, and, when viewing the pattern 3C in which the frame 615C is blue, displays the special game state. The lowest expectations for

  In particular, the correlation between the color of the frame of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, and pattern 3C) that constitutes the third special effect and the possibility of transition to the special game state is determined by each pattern (that constitutes the first special effect). Since the configuration is the same as that of the pattern 1A, pattern 1B, and pattern 1C), the player instinctively determines the degree of expectation for the special game state for the frame color in the third special effect from the regularity of the frame color. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the third hit table, the selection probability of the pattern 3A is the highest (for example, 70%), the selection probability of the pattern 3B is the second highest (for example, 25%), and the pattern 3C Is set to be the lowest (for example, 5%). On the other hand, in the third out-of-office table, the selection probability of the pattern 3C is the highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 3B is the second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of the pattern 3A is the lowest. (For example, 2%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the third special effect started at time t8 or time t11 ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start (time t9 or time t12). Note that the third special effect (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) is displayed on the layer in front of the battle effect, so that the player has completed the third special effect at time t9 or time t12. The battle effect is seen on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 479 has a variation display of the decorative symbol including a predetermined reach display, the predetermined operation is performed by pressing the pressing operation device 261. Suggestive effects can appear.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 13, the operation period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be pushed is three times (that is, the first operation period and the second operation period) during the one-time display of the decoration symbol. , And a third operable period), and when the player presses the pressing operation device 261 in each operable period, a suggestive effect (ie, a first special effect, a first special effect, The second special effect and the third special effect) can be displayed (displayed) on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  Therefore, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in the example shown in FIG. 13, three operable periods are provided during one variable display, so that the pressing operation device 261 in each operable period is provided. In accordance with the presence or absence of the operation, the suggested effect can appear in various patterns (more specifically, eight patterns).

  First, in the first pattern, by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during a first operable period started at time t1, a first special effect is produced at time t2 and started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, the second special effect is made to appear at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the third operable period started at time t10. This is a pattern in which the third special effect and the battle effect appear at time t11.

  The second pattern is to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period started at the time t1, to cause the first special effect to appear at the time t2, and to start the second special operation at the time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect appears at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period started at time t10. This is a pattern in which at the time t11, only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear.

  In the third pattern, by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, the first special effect is caused to appear at time t2, and the second pattern is started at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect does not appear, and performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7. This is a pattern in which a third special effect and a battle effect appear at time t8.

  In the fourth pattern, a first special effect is produced at time t2 by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in a first operable period started at time t1, and a second operation started at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect does not appear, and by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7. In this pattern, at time t8, only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear.

  In the fifth pattern, the second special effect does not appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation is started at time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect appears at time t6, and performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10. This is a pattern in which a third special effect and a battle effect appear at time t11.

  In the sixth pattern, the second special effect does not appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at the time t1, and the second operable started at the time t5. By performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect appears at time t6, and by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10. In this pattern, at time t11, only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear.

  In the seventh pattern, the second special effect does not appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period started at time t1, and the second operation is started at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect does not appear, and performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7, at time t8. Is a pattern for producing a third special effect and a battle effect.

  In the eighth pattern, the second special effect does not appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period started at the time t1, and the second operable started at the time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period, the second special effect does not appear, and by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7, the time This is a pattern in which, at t8, only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear.

  As described above, in the case where a plurality of operable periods are provided while one variable display is performed, a plurality of types of patterns are provided depending on whether or not the pressing operation device 261 is operated in each operable period. The suggestion effect can appear in one of the patterns.

  As described above, as an example of the variable display provided with a plurality of operable periods, the variable display including the super reach having the variable display time of 90 seconds has been exemplified. However, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display time Is also provided with a plurality of operable periods in a variable display including a super reach having a length other than 90 seconds. Regardless of the type of reach display included, a configuration in which a plurality of operable periods are provided for a variable display (variable display including reach display) in which the variable display time is longer than a predetermined time may be provided. . The number of operable periods provided may be different depending on the length of the variable display time. Further, the number of operable periods provided for one variable display may be one.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after performing a variable display in which a plurality of suggested effects can appear, such as a variable display including a super reach shown in FIG. When the gaming state has transitioned to the special gaming state, the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special gaming state includes a decorative symbol change display, including a suggestive effect that can appear during the variable display. And can be restored.

  In order to realize such a configuration, the sub control board 940 executes a variable display in which a plurality of suggested effects can appear, such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be performed (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is a big hit, the stop symbol of each row immediately before the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, the example of FIG. 13) “653”), the lottery result of the first special rendering lottery, the lottery result of the second special rendering lottery, the lottery result of the third special rendering lottery, the lottery result of the battle rendering lottery, and the fixed display of the decorative symbol Is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM, for example, in each of the columns (e.g., "777" in the example of FIG. 13).

  These pieces of information (that is, the stop symbol before the change display of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the fixed display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery result of each effect lottery) are stored at predetermined timing. Alternatively, one or a plurality of pieces of information may be stored at each of a plurality of timings. The information may be stored at the timing at which the variable display ends (that is, the timing at which the fixed display is displayed), at the timing at which the variable display starts, or when each effect lottery is performed. It may be a timing to be performed.

<Restoration of suggested effects in special game state>
In a configuration in which a plurality of suggested effects appear during one change display, the suggested effect that appears later is less likely to transition to the special game state than the suggested effect that appeared earlier. In this case, there is a possibility that the player loses the expectation of transitioning from the currently displayed variable display to the special game state and is discouraged from playing the game. In order to prevent such discouragement, the player can choose not to operate the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period.

  However, in some cases, such as when the finalized display of the decorative symbol is a display indicating that a big hit has been won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the player does not appear on his own initiative. You may want to know later what was going on if you had a suggestive production appear.

  In response to such a case, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the special gaming state, the decorative symbol display device 479 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special gaming state. It is configured to be able to restore including the suggestive effects that can appear during the fluctuation display.

  Hereinafter, the configuration will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen in which a player can select whether or not to restore a fluctuating display of a decorative symbol performed before the transition to the special game state in the special game state. It is. FIG. 17 (b) is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is restored in the special game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game state transitions to the special game state after a fluctuation display in which a plurality of suggested effects can appear is performed, such as the fluctuation display including the super reach shown in FIG. In this case, when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) of a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) executed in the special gaming state is started, before the transition to the special gaming state, A screen as shown in FIG. 17A is displayed as a decorative pattern display as a screen (hereinafter, also referred to as a “restoration selection screen”) from which the player can select whether or not to restore the changed decorative pattern display that has been performed. Displayed on device 479.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the restoration selection screen includes a character 621 that informs the player that the variable display of the decorative pattern, which was performed before the transition to the special game state, can be restored, and a decoration. An image 622 that reminds the player that a pressing operation can be performed on the pressing operation device 261 to restore the symbol change display is a round number display 631 that informs the player of the current round number in the special game state. Is configured as a screen displayed on a special game state screen including

  The character 621 and the image 622 are displayed on the special game state screen at a timing when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) is started in the special game state, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the display. After). That is, the restoration selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 over a period from the start of the predetermined round in the special game state to the lapse of a predetermined time such as 5 seconds. Note that display data relating to the display of the character 621 and the image 622 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and display and erasure are controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  When the player performs the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period in which the restoration selection screen is displayed, the sub control board 940 displays the decorative symbol in a variation display which was performed before the transition to the special game state in execution. Based on each information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM (ie, the stop symbol before the decorative symbol change display, the stop symbol for the fixed display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery result of each effect drawing), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. , Including the suggested effects that can appear during the fluctuation display.

  That is, in the example of FIG. 13 described above, the decorative display stopped at “653” starts to be changed, and when the first operable period comes, as shown in FIG. 17B, the image 601 is displayed. And a character 602 are displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the first operable period, the first special effect according to the stored lottery result of the first special effect lottery is executed.

  When the second operable period comes after the left symbol stops at “7”, an image 603 is displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the second operable period, the second special effect according to the stored lottery result of the second special effect lottery is executed.

  When the third operable period comes after the right symbol stops at “7” so as to reach the reach display, the image 605 and the character 606 are displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the third operable period, the third special effect according to the stored lottery result of the third special effect lottery, and the third special effect according to the stored lottery result of the battle effect lottery are determined. The battle effect is displayed, and at the timing when the fluctuation display time (for example, 90 seconds in the example of FIG. 13) of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed, the middle symbol finally stops at “7”. In other words, the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed as “777”.

  On the other hand, when the pressing operation device 261 is not operated during the third operable period, the battle effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the battle effect drawing is displayed, and the execution is performed in the same manner as when the pressing operation device 261 is operated. At the timing when the fluctuation display time of the medium fluctuation display has elapsed, the medium symbol finally stops at “7”.

  Therefore, in the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed before the transition to the special game state being executed, is restored as described above, the player can perform the operable period provided three times (the first operable period). , The second operable period, and the third operable period), the first special effect and the second special effect are performed by pressing the pressing operation device 261 during all operable periods or a part of the operable periods. Or among the third special effects, a special effect that the user wants to see can be seen.

  That is, in the restored display of the decorative symbols, the operable period corresponding to the operable period in which the operation of the pressing operation device 261 was performed during the variable display of the decorative symbols performed before the special game state is performed. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in this manner, the player, even in the reconstructed display of the decorative pattern, displays the special pattern viewed during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern performed before the special game state. You can see the production again.

  On the other hand, in the restored decorative symbol change display, the operable period corresponding to the operable period during which the operation of the pressing operation device 261 was not performed during the decorative pattern change display performed before the special game state is performed. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 for the period, the player is restored to the special effect that was not seen during the variation display of the decorative pattern performed before the special game state. This can be seen in the variation display of the decorative pattern.

  Therefore, for example, in the variation display of the decorative pattern in the example shown in FIG. 13, as described above, suggestive effects (first special effect, second special effect, third effect) in eight patterns from the first to the eighth. Special effects and battle effects) can be displayed, but in the restored display of the decorative symbols, the same pattern as the pattern displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols performed before the special game state is used. A suggestion effect can be expressed by a pattern, or a suggestion effect can be expressed by a different pattern.

  Here, the restoration of the variable display of the decorative symbol does not necessarily have to restore the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display, and a part of the variable display may be restored, and a start winning may occur. A period during which the variable display is executed a plurality of times until the variable display corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is executed may be made reproducible, or the player may be able to select the time to be reconstructed.

  The restoration selection screen may be displayed a plurality of times during the special game state, such as displaying the restoration selection screen in the third round and the seventh round in the special game state. In other words, a configuration may be employed in which the variable display of the decorative symbol can be restored a plurality of times during the special game state. By adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the decorative symbol can be restored a plurality of times, the player can suggest different types of patterns that are different from the pattern displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol performed before the special game state. Can appear.

  When the decorative symbol change display performed before the transition to the running special game state is restored to the decorative symbol display device 479, the restoration is performed as shown in FIG. A round number display 641 indicating the current round number is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, a lower right portion of the screen) so that the player can recognize the current round number during the game. The display of the round number display 641 is controlled by the sub control board 940. Note that, instead of displaying the round number display 641, a reduced screen of the special game state screen may be displayed in a predetermined area.

<Pending full production>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved and the number of times the unit game right related to the second special symbol is reserved are both the maximum number of times, that is, for both special symbols. When the number of reservations reaches a total of eight, a predetermined effect (hereinafter, this effect is also referred to as “hold full effect”) appears on the decorative symbol display device 479 under predetermined conditions.

  The holding full tank effect may be an effect that is immediately executed at the timing when the number of holdings reaches eight in total, or a fluctuation display for a certain period (for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is executed) Until a predetermined time (or a period until a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) elapses) is started, and the start of the special period changes the background color of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479. The effect may be suggested to the player by causing the player to display a specific color on the periphery of the display screen. In addition, the holding full tank effect is such that a specific sound effect is output at the timing when the number of holdings reaches eight, a specific character that does not appear except during a special period during the fluctuation display appears, or a decoration pattern is displayed. Expectation of the random display for a specific movement (for example, high-speed movement) or the lottery result of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) for the hold each time the hold display color is 1 The color indicating the degree (for example, the color of the display part indicating the hold is displayed in blue, yellow, red, and rainbow colors, and the color order is consistent with the color indicating the other expected degrees. This is an effect that is not seen at all in other situations other than the special period, or has a special feeling that is hard to see.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held and the number of times the unit game right related to the second special symbol is held are both set to the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holdings). When it has reached, the probability of appearance of the hold full tank effect depends on whether or not all of these holds include the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery). Are configured to be different.

  More specifically, if the hold for the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, the hold with a higher probability than when the hold for the special symbol lottery is not included It is configured so that a full tank effect appears. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, when the hold of the special symbol lottery is included in the hold of the maximum number of times, the hold full tank effect appears with a probability of 80%, If the winning pattern is not included in the symbol lottery, the full holding effect will appear only with a probability of 10%.

  The lottery for determining whether or not to display the reserved full effect (hereinafter also referred to as “reserved full effect lottery”) is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. More specifically, the holding full effect drawing lottery is performed when the sub-control board 940 reaches the maximum number of each of the holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By acquiring the value of the full tank effect counter (part of the area of the RAM) and referring to the reserved full tank effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the reserved full tank effect counter. Done.

  The main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information on the number of suspensions at a predetermined timing every time the number of suspensions for each special symbol changes. The sub control board 940 can determine whether or not each of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number based on the information notified from the main control board 920.

  The main control board 920 may execute a predetermined command (hereinafter referred to as a command) including information on the number of times of holding of each special symbol at a timing when the number of times of holding for the special symbol increases due to the start winning of each special symbol. This command is also referred to as a “hold command”) to the sub-control board 940 to notify the sub-control board 940 of information on the number of times of suspension. Further, the main control board 920, for example, at the timing when the main control board 920 transmits the variation pattern command (that is, the timing at which the number of times of suspension for a special symbol decreases), transmits the variation pattern command including the information on the number of suspensions to the sub control board. By transmitting the information to the sub-control board 940, the sub-control board 940 is notified.

  The hold command includes information on the number of times of holding of each special symbol, as well as information on the lottery result of each special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). When receiving the hold command from the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 associates the information on the result of the special symbol lottery with the receiving order of the hold command (that is, the order in which the start winning prize is generated) and stores the RAM in the RAM. , And thereafter, when the corresponding hold is exhausted (ie, the held unit game is executed), the information is deleted. The sub-control board 940 can determine, based on the information stored in the RAM, whether or not the holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol includes the holding for the special symbol lottery. .

  The hold full tank effect counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and when the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing. Is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0").

  The first table to be referred to when the hold of the special symbol lottery is included in the hold of the maximum number of times, and the special symbol lottery in the hold of the maximum number of times. A second table to be referred to when the winning hold is not included is prepared. The first table is set so that the appearance of the suspended full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80% as in the example shown in FIG. 18). The second table is also set so that the appearance of the held full effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10% as in the example shown in FIG. 18).

  The sub-control board 940 executes the pending full tank effect when the appearance of the pending full tank effect is selected in the pending full tank effect lottery.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 performs a holding full tank effect lottery when each of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number. However, when the main control board 920 reaches the maximum number of times for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the same maximum number of times as the holding full tank effect lottery performed by the sub control substrate 940. It is good also as composition which performs a production lottery. In such a configuration, when the appearance of the hold full tank effect is selected in the hold full tank effect lottery, the main control board 920 notifies the sub control board 940 of information notifying that, and the sub control board 940 Executes the pending full effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, during the special game state, the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special game state presses the decorative symbol variable display during the variable display. It is configured to be able to be restored including the suggested effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect) that can be made to appear by operating the operation device 261.

  Therefore, even if the player does not intentionally operate the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period provided for causing the suggested effect to appear during the period of the variable display of the decorative symbol, The player can later restore and view the suggested effect that was not seen because the player did not operate the pressing operation device 261.

  As a result, the player may have negative emotions in the game, such as regretting that he did not see the suggested effect that he could see during the period of display of the decorative pattern , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when both the number of times of holding the unit game right related to the first special symbol and the number of times of holding the unit game right related to the second special symbol reach the maximum number, , The reserved full effect appears on the decorative symbol display device 479 under predetermined conditions. Therefore, since the player has the purpose of increasing the number of times of holding for each special symbol, the willingness to play is improved.

  In particular, when the hold for the maximum number of times includes a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery, the hold full tank production has a higher probability than when the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is not included. Is configured to appear. In other words, in the case where the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, the hold full tank effect is more likely to appear than in the case where the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is not included Thus, a situation can be created in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by the appearance of the held full tank effect. Therefore, the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the lottery result of the holding full tank effect may be indicated to the player by a variable display different from the variable display related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol to the player, for example, At the timing when the number of times of holding that triggers the execution of the lottery of the holding full tank effect reaches the upper limit, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 (for example, the upper right corner) is formed in a circular shape in a front view in the circumferential direction. A roulette display in which fan-shaped areas with "hit" and "losing" indications are displayed in order, and a variable display by roulette effect where any of the areas is displayed brightly in turn and held In response to the lottery result of the full tank effect, finally, an effect in which the lit portion stops in the area of "hit" or "losing" may be executed, and thereafter, the reserved full tank effect may be executed. . Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the situation is that there is a possibility that the suspended full tank effect will be executed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a function (hereinafter, referred to as a function that allows the player to cancel the execution of the second and subsequent suggestion effects out of a plurality of suggestion effects that can appear during a single variable display). This function is also referred to as a “suggested effect cancel function”). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 19 is a time chart for explaining the suggested effect cancel function. FIG. 19 illustrates a case where the player cancels the suggested effect in the variable display including the super reach in which the variable display time is 90 seconds illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 19, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period from time t1 to time t2, the first special effect is performed during the period from time t2 to time t3. After the first special effect ends at time t3, the first cancelable period starts at time ta1 (for example, one second after the first special effect ends). The first cancelable period ends at a time ta2 after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the time ta1.

  Note that the first cancelable period only needs to be provided in a period before the second operable period is started. Therefore, for example, the first cancelable period may be started at time t3 when the first special effect ends, or the first cancel period may be ended at time t4 when the left symbol stops. Is also good.

  In the first cancellation period, the control of the sub-control board 940 informs the player that the display of the subsequent suggested effect can be canceled based on the display data prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. Characters and images are displayed. For example, a character indicating a comment that informs the player that the display of the suggestion effect can be canceled is displayed, or the image similar to the image 601 reminds the player that a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is possible. The image is displayed.

  When the player performs the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancel period, the second operable period and the third operable period do not occur, and when the right symbol is stopped at time t7 so that the reach display is displayed, The non-battle effect is started by the control of the sub-control board 940.

  The non-battle effect, unlike the suggestive effects such as the first special effect and the battle effect, is an effect in which the degree of ease of transition to the special game state after the decorative pattern is definitely displayed is not recalled. The non-battle effect is, for example, an introduction video of a character appearing in a suggestive effect such as a first special effect that can appear in the variable display, and its display data is prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the second operable period starts at time t5 on condition that the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancellation period. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period from time t5 to time t6, and the second special effect is performed during the period from time t6 to time t10, the second special effect is performed. The second cancelable period starts at time ta3 (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the second special effect) within the execution period of the effect. The second cancelable period ends at time ta4 after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from time ta3.

  Note that the second cancelable period only needs to be provided before the third operable period starts. Therefore, for example, the second cancelable period may be started at a time t6 when the second special effect starts, or the time t10 at which the right symbol stops (or the second special effect ends). Alternatively, the second cancellation period may end.

  In the second cancellation period, similarly to the first cancellation period described above, the control of the sub-control board 940 cancels the display of the subsequent suggested effect to the player based on the display data prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940. Characters, images, etc. that inform you of what you can do are displayed.

  When the player performs the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancel period, the third operable period does not occur, and the right symbol is stopped at the reach display at time t10. A non-battle effect similar to the case where the user performs the pushing operation on the pushing operation device 261 is started by the control of the sub-control board 940.

  Note that the non-battle effect production time started at time t10 by the player operating the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancellation period is equal to the first cancellation effect except when the second special effect is the pattern 2D. The period is shorter than the battle effect started at time t7 due to the player operating the pressing operation device 261 during the period.

  The display data of the battle effect started at time t10 by the player operating the pressing operation device 261 in the second cancellation period is also changed to the time t7 by the player operating the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancellation period. Are prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in the same manner as the display data of the battle effect started in.

  Although not shown in FIG. 19, during the third operable period, the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancellation period, and the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancellation period. Is started at time t7. When the third operable period occurs, at least a battle effect appears as a suggested effect regardless of whether or not the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of suggestive effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect, and battle effect) that can appear while one variable display is performed, Since the player has a function (suggested effect canceling function) that allows the player to cancel the execution of the suggested effect (second special effect, third special effect, battle effect) after the second time, the suggestive effect that appeared later, It is possible to suppress a situation indicating that the possibility of transition to the special game state is lower than the suggestion effect that appeared earlier. Therefore, the player loses expectations for the occurrence of the special game state due to the contents of the suggestion effect that appears later, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, a predetermined suggested effect is the decorative symbol of the pachinko machine 100 that is the own machine. When the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period while being displayed on the display device 479, a predetermined suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100. . In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 20 shows a pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as “pachinko machine 100A” for convenience) and another pachinko machine communicably connected to the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a machine 100 (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as “pachinko machine 100B” for convenience).

  As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko machine 100A is communicably connected to the pachinko machine 100B via the LAN 651. The connection between the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B is not limited to the LAN 651, but may be a direct connection with a cable or the like or a wireless connection based on various standards such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100B which is a communication partner of the pachinko machine 100A may be the pachinko machine 100 installed at a specific position with respect to the pachinko machine 100A, such as the right side of the pachinko machine 100A, or a game hall ( Among the plurality of pachinko machines 100 installed in the hall, a predetermined pachinko machine 100 designated by the pachinko machine 100A may be used. Note that the number of pachinko machines 100B to be communicated with by the pachinko machine 100A may be one or more.

  When an operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs while the decorative symbol is being fluctuated on the pachinko machine 100A, the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period. In this case, the suggested effect corresponding to the operable period (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A, which is its own machine.

  On the other hand, when the player performs a directional operation on the selection operation device 263 in a predetermined direction (for example, rightward) in the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100A, the suggestion effect corresponding to the operable period is performed. The information is transmitted via the LAN 651 to the pachinko machine 100B that is determined in advance as a communication partner.

  The information transmitted from the pachinko machine 100A to the pachinko machine 100B (information related to the suggested effect corresponding to the operable period) is selected by the pattern selected as the suggested effect (for example, the first special effect lottery in the first embodiment). (A first special effect pattern). Transmission of information to the pachinko machine 100B is performed by control of the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100A.

  When the pachinko machine 100B receives the information from the pachinko machine 100A, based on the received information, the effect of the pattern selected in the pachinko machine 100A, that is, the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period. In this case, the suggestion effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B. The display control in the pachinko machine 100B is performed by controlling the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period generated during the display of the variation of the decorative symbol, the suggestion effect corresponding to the operable period. Can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A, which is the player's own machine, and when the player performs a predetermined direction operation on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, the corresponding operation is performed. The suggested effect corresponding to the possible period can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B, which is another pachinko machine.

  The pachinko machine 100B controls the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B when displaying the suggested effect on the decorative design display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the information received from the pachinko machine 100A. The reduced screen of the screen (for example, the screen on which the variable display is performed) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the game is changed to a predetermined area (for example, the screen) of the decorative symbol display device 479. At the lower right of the display).

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the change display of the decorative symbol, a suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A that is its own machine. On the other hand, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, a suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100B.

  As described above, the display position of the suggested effect can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selecting operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the suggested effect is displayed according to the operation of the player. A variety of games can be provided, and the interest can be improved.

  In particular, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggested effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100B, so that the suggested effect is played by another pachinko machine 100B. It can be viewed with the player, and can have a different interest than when playing the game alone.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the change display of the decorative symbol, the predetermined suggestion effect is performed by the decorative symbol display device. It is configured to be displayed in an area different from the area in which the variable display of the decorative symbol in 479 is displayed. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 21 is a screen diagram illustrating an example of display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When an operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol on the pachinko machine 100, the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period. In this case, a suggestion effect (for example, a first special effect in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  On the other hand, when the player performs a directional operation on the selection operation device 263 in a predetermined direction (for example, rightward) during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. The suggested effect corresponding to the period is displayed in the right area 479A of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  In contrast to the right region 479A where the suggested effect is displayed, the left region 479B has a display content when the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period (for example, the first region in the first embodiment). (Variation display after one operable period) is displayed.

  When the suggestion effect displayed in the area 479A on the right side has been completed, the continuation of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. Alternatively, the continuation of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be displayed in the left area 479B, and nothing may be displayed in the right area 479A. The continuation of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left and right areas 479A and 479B may be employed. May be displayed.

  Note that the control related to the above-described display in this embodiment is performed by the sub-control board 940.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the suggested effect is that of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479. It is displayed in an area different from the area where the variable display is displayed.

  As described above, the display position of the suggested effect can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selecting operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the suggested effect is displayed according to the operation of the player. A variety of games can be provided, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, the suggestion effect displayed by operating the selection operation device 263 by the player, and the content displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when neither the pressing operation device 261 nor the selection operation device 263 is operated. Can be simultaneously watched, so that the interest in the game is suitably improved.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holdings), all of these are set. The appearance probability of the full hold effect differs depending on whether or not the hold includes a win in the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, when the number of holdings of the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holdings), , The appearance probability of the holding full tank effect varies depending on the number of the arrival within the predetermined period. In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the number of times each of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number increases in a predetermined period, the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect increases. Is configured so that there is a portion where the height is higher. Hereinafter, the “predetermined period” is also referred to as a “pending number monitoring period”.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22, when the number of holdings for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number for the first time during the predetermined period, the holding full tank effect is In the case of the second time, the pending full tank effect appears with a probability of 70%, and in the case of the third time, the pending full tank effect with a probability of 80%. If it is the fourth time or later, the held full tank effect appears with a 95% probability.

  Here, when the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the upper limit a plurality of times during the predetermined period, not only the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect is changed, but also the effect contents are different. It is good also as a structure which makes it. A privilege may be given to the player when the appearance of the held full effect is selected during a predetermined period for a plurality of predetermined times, and the privilege may be, for example, a plurality of times during the predetermined period. Only when the appearance of the hold full effect is selected, the hold full effect may be executed by an effect using a different character for each number of times, or the hold full effect may be performed a plurality of times during a predetermined period. When the appearance of the tongue effect is selected, it is possible to restore the above-described decorative design change display during the special game state thereafter, and the number of times the appearance of the hold full effect is selected during the predetermined period is reduced. The number of restorations may be increased as the number is increased. Thereby, even if the appearance of the hold full effect is once selected and the hold full effect is executed, the player continues the game so that the number of times of hold reaches the upper limit again during the predetermined period. This makes it possible to suppress the situation in which the player stops watching the game due to the waiting full tank effect and the operation of the gaming machine is reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the suspension count monitoring period starts at a point in time when each of the suspension counts for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number at a certain time, and the number of suspensions is all This is a period until the game is consumed (that is, until the unit game relating to the first or second special symbol is performed the maximum number of times).

  Note that a period from the start point until the unit game relating to the first or second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times greater or less than the maximum number of times may be set as a suspension count monitoring period, or a predetermined number of times may be determined from the start point. The period until the set time elapses may be set as the suspension count monitoring period. Further, the starting point of the suspension count monitoring period is not limited to the time when each suspension count for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum frequency, but may be a predetermined time (for example, 0 minute every hour). Or the time point when the player gives an instruction in a predetermined manner.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the holding full tank effect lottery is the same as the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, in which the sub control board 940 sets the maximum number of times each of the holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the number of times reaches the number, the value of the reserved full effect counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub-control board 940 is obtained, and the value of the reserved full effect counter is compared with the value of the reserved full-effect counter. This is performed by referring to the pending full tank effect selection table prepared in the ROM.

  The hold full tank effect selection table according to the present embodiment is referred to when the number of times of holding each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number is the first time in the number-of-holds monitoring period. A first table, a second table to be referred to in the second time, a third table to be referred to in the third time, and a fourth table to be referred to in the fourth and subsequent times are prepared.

  The first table is set so that the appearance of the held full effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50% as in the example shown in FIG. 22), and the second table is also determined in advance. It is set so that the appearance of the reserved full effect is selected with the given probability (for example, a probability of 70% as in the example shown in FIG. 22). The third table and the fourth table are also set so that the appearance of the held full effect is selected with a predetermined probability.

  The sub-control board 940 sets a period flag (a partial area of the RAM) set when the number-of-retentions monitoring period is set, and sets the number of times for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the number-of-retentions monitoring period. Each of them has an arrival counter (a part of the RAM) for counting the number of times the maximum number has been reached, and a remaining period counter (a part of the RAM) for counting the remaining period of the suspension count monitoring period. Note that the initial values of the arrival counter and the remaining period counter are “0”.

  The sub-control board 940 sets the period flag when the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol both reaches the maximum number in a state where the period flag is not set, and sets 1 to the arrival counter. In addition, the sum of the upper limit values of the number of times of suspension for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (“8” in the present embodiment) is set in the remaining period counter. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to the first table to perform a holding full tank effect lottery, and executes a holding full tank effect when the appearance of the holding full tank effect is selected.

  The sub-control board 940 adds 1 to the arrival counter when the holding flag for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number in a state where the period flag is set, and sets the remaining period counter to Subtract one. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to a table corresponding to the value of the arrival counter in the hold full tank effect selection table, performs a hold full tank effect lottery, and selects the appearance of the hold full tank effect. Executes the held full effect.

  When the value of the remaining period counter becomes “0” by updating the remaining period counter, the sub-control board 940 determines that the suspension count monitoring period has ended, cancels the setting of the period flag, and sets the arrival counter. Is set to "0" which is an initial value.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub control board 940 is configured to perform the holding full tank production lottery. However, the main control board 920 is configured to perform the same holding full tank production lottery performed by the sub control board 940. It is good also as composition which performs a full tank production lottery. In such a configuration, when the appearance of the hold full tank effect is selected in the hold full tank effect lottery, the main control board 920 notifies the sub control board 940 of information notifying that, and the sub control board 940 Executes the pending full effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (upper limit of the number of holdings), the arrival thereof is predetermined. It is configured such that the appearance probability of the pending full tank effect varies depending on the number of times of arrival during the period.

  Therefore, when the number of times of holding for each special symbol reaches the upper limit again within the predetermined period, the suggested effect becomes easier to appear as compared to the case where the number of holdings reaches the upper limit before that, and the player With the aim of increasing the number of holdings for each special symbol, it is possible to launch a game in which game balls are fired aiming at entering the starting device according to each special symbol. Thereby, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be easily increased (the number of holdings can be easily stored). In the following description, the same components as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  In the special game state, since the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol tends to reach the upper limit by the game ball fired during the special game state, when the reach display appears in the variation display of the decorative symbol, In view of the fact that the special game state will occur after that, the player who saw the game stops firing the game ball so as not to increase the number of holdings before the special game state occurs (that is, during the fluctuation display). There are many cases. In other words, the appearance of the reach display in the variation display of the decorative symbol can be one of the causes of the difficulty in increasing the number of pending unit games related to the special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 (that is, when the sub control board 940 is When a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation display including the reach display is received from the control board 920), when there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery among the holds for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is configured to execute, at a predetermined probability, a variable display including a plurality of variable displays that do not include the reach display (ie, complete loss variable display) for the same variable display time (variable time) as the selected variable display. Is done.

  For example, FIG. 23A is a time chart illustrating an example of a variable display including a reach display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 60 seconds. In the variable display including the reach display, when the right symbol stops and the reach display occurs, the player tends to stop emitting the game ball for a relatively long period until the middle symbol stops thereafter.

  On the other hand, FIG. 23B is a time chart showing an example of the complete loss fluctuation display. The variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is configured to be longer than the variable display time of the complete loss variable display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 20 seconds.

  FIG. 23C is a time chart showing a variable display in which the variable display time is 60 seconds, which is composed of a complete loss variable display in which the variable display time is 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 23C, by repeating the complete loss fluctuation display shown in FIG. 23B three times, the same fluctuation display time as the fluctuation display including the reach display shown in FIG. Second).

  In addition, for each of the variable displays including the reach display prepared in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, the complete loss variable display is changed to form a variable display of the same variable display time as the variable display including the reach display. Information that specifies whether to combine them in advance is prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in advance. The sub-control board 940 configures the variable display based on the information by combining the target complete loss variable display so as to have the same variable display time as the variable display including the reach display.

  On the other hand, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the special symbol lottery is won while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being held. If there is no hold, the complete loss variation display with the same variation display time as the selected variation display is performed with a predetermined probability, multiple times, as in the case where there is a hold winning the special symbol lottery. Is configured to be executed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the probability that the variable display including the complete loss variable display for a plurality of times is executed depends on whether or not the special symbol lottery is selected while being held for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The case where there is a hold is higher than the case where there is no hold winning the special symbol lottery among the holds for the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  The lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “non-reach mode lottery”) as to whether or not to execute the variable display including the complete loss fluctuation display a plurality of times is performed by control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the non-reach mode lottery, when the sub control board 940 receives a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation display including the reach display from the main control board 920, the selection counter ( This is performed by acquiring the value of a part of the RAM) and referring to a selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

  The selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)). At the update timing, if the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”), The value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and when the value of the counter is a specified maximum value, the counter value is changed to a specified minimum value (“0”).

  As the selection table, a first table to be referred to when a special symbol lottery has been held among the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And a second table to be referred to when there is no hold winning the special symbol lottery. The first table has a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80%), and the execution of the fluctuation display including the complete loss fluctuation display for a plurality of times with the same fluctuation display time as the fluctuation display indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is selected. Is set to In the second table, the execution of the fluctuation display including the complete loss fluctuation display for a plurality of times with the same fluctuation display time as the fluctuation display indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10%). Set to be selected.

  In the non-reach mode lottery, the sub control board 940 selects the execution of the fluctuation display including the complete loss fluctuation display for a plurality of times during the same fluctuation display time as the fluctuation display indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command, when the complete loss fluctuation is selected. Execute a variable display that includes multiple displays.

  If the fluctuation display indicated by the reach fluctuation pattern received from the main control board 920 subsequently generates a special game state (that is, a special symbol lottery is won), the sub control board 940 displays the complete loss fluctuation display. Is controlled so that the stop symbol (fixed display) in the variable display including the combination of the symbols is a big hit symbol.

  FIG. 23 illustrates the case where the variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is an integral multiple of the variable display time of the complete loss variable display, but the variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is completely lost. If the variable display time of the variable display is not an integral multiple of the variable display time, the sub-control board 940 extends or shortens the variable display time of one or a plurality of complete loss variable displays, so that the entire variable display time becomes the main variable display time. Control is performed so that the fluctuation display time (variation display including the reach display) corresponding to the reach fluctuation pattern received from the control board 920 becomes the fluctuation display time.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, the special symbol lottery is selected while being held for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If there is a hold, a variable display is performed with a predetermined probability that the variable display including the reach display is not included (ie, the complete loss variable display) for a plurality of times with the same variable display time as the selected variable display. It is configured to be.

  In this way, by making it difficult to execute the variable display including the reach display, it is possible to suppress the event that the player stops firing the game ball when the reach display appears, and thus the first special symbol is used. In addition, it is possible to easily increase the number of times of holding the right of each unit game relating to the second special symbol (easy to store the holding). Therefore, in the configuration in which the above-mentioned holding full tank effect is performed, since the holding for each special symbol is easily accumulated, the holding full tank effect becomes easy to appear, so that the player cannot see the holding full tank effect. This makes it less likely to cause dissatisfaction and suppresses the decrease in interest in the game.

  Only when there is a hold for each special symbol that has won the special symbol lottery, a floating display that includes multiple displays that do not include the reach display appears instead of a floating display that includes the reach display. Therefore, in the case where the special symbol lottery is held among the special symbol lotteries, the hold is more likely to be accumulated than in the case where there is no special symbol lottery hold. Therefore, when there is a hold that has won the special symbol lottery among the holds for each special symbol, it becomes easier to show the full tank effect than when there is no hold that has won the special symbol lottery Thus, a situation can be created in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by the appearance of the held full tank effect. As a result, the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the variable display including the variable display including the reach display for a plurality of times appears instead of the variable display including the reach display, the variable display time corresponding to the variable display including the reach display does not include the reach display. There is no need to have dedicated display data for variable display, and display data for variable display that does not include reach display can be used for a variable display time shorter than variable display that includes reach display. Thereby, the consumption of storage capacity in the pachinko machine 100 is appropriately suppressed.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the decorative symbols are displayed (variable display, stop display) on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. However, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, Cylindrical reels 711L, 711M, 711R with decorative symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided side by side, and the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are respectively rotated to display the decorative symbols variably. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, a description will be given of a structural configuration of a game board 400X of the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a front view of a game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 25A is a front view of a reel device 710, and FIG. It is a front view of 711M.

  Like the game board 400, the game board 400X also has a substantially circular game area formed on the front side of the base 401 by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, and a game ball fired from the firing device 330. When the game ball enters the game area beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404, the game ball moves (flows down) in the game area while dropping by its own weight.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400 </ b> X is provided with flow-down members such as nails 411 and windmills 412, a central structure 420 disposed substantially at the center of the base 401, and the like, similarly to the game board 400. In addition, the upper starting winning device 1431 arranged below the central structure 420, the lower starting winning device 1432 arranged below the upper starting winning device 1431, and the lower starting winning device 1432 Large winning a prize device 1434 arranged on the lower side, and starting devices 1436A and 1436B arranged on both left and right sides of central structure 420 are provided. Here, the upper starting winning device 1431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left starting winning device 1431A and the right starting winning device 1431B) are integrated like the middle starting winning device 431.

  The game board 400X has switches (detection means) for detecting passage of a game ball corresponding to the left and right starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B, the lower starting winning device 1432, and the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B, respectively. A plurality of game balls (not shown) are provided, and it is possible to detect entry of a game ball into a predetermined area corresponding to each switch.

  Specifically, a left start winning switch for detecting a game ball entering the left start winning device 1431A, a right start winning switch for detecting a game ball entering the right start winning device 1431B, and a game entering the lower start winning device 1432. A lower start winning switch for detecting a ball, a large winning switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning device 1434, a left start switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the left starting device 1436A, and a right starting device 1436B have been entered. A right start switch for detecting a game ball is provided on the game board 400. Each of these switches is connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the general prize switches 449A and 449B (see FIG. 10) for detecting game balls that have entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B, respectively.

  In the following, for convenience, the above-mentioned left start winning switch, right start winning switch, lower start winning switch, big win switch, left start switch, and right start switch are referred to as “left start winning switch 1441A”, “ Also referred to as "right start winning switch 1441B", "lower start winning switch 1442", "big win switch 1444", "left start switch 1446A", and "right start switch 1446B".

  The entrance portion of the game ball in the left starting winning device 1431A, the right starting winning device 1431B, the lower starting winning device 1432, and the big winning device 1434 constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is formed on the base 401. Through the formed through hole, it is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. On the other hand, game balls that have not entered each of the winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). For each of the above winning devices, the entrance portion of the game ball in the left starting device 1436A and the right starting device 1436B constitutes a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area.

  The left starting winning device 1431A is a starting device according to a first special symbol, like the left middle starting winning device 431A, and the right starting winning device 1431B is a starting device according to the second special symbol, like the right middle winning device 431B. Device. That is, the upper starting winning device 1431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device according to a first special symbol and a starting device according to a second special symbol.

  The upper starting winning device 1431 includes a distribution unit (not shown in FIG. 24) that distributes a game ball entered from the entrance 1611 to either the left starting winning device 1431A or the right starting winning device 1431B. The distribution unit is provided on the back side of the base 401, and a game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 is guided to the back side of the base 401 by a passage (not shown) and is used for distribution by the distribution unit. .

  Similar to the distribution unit 620, the distribution unit of the upper starting prize device 1431 is configured such that the prize devices 1431A and 1431B to which the game balls are distributed are alternately switched every time a game ball enters from the entrance 1611. . Thus, the game ball that has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 basically alternately enters the left starting winning device 1431A or the right starting winning device 1431B.

  The upper starting winning device 1431 is configured so that the probability of entering the entrance 1611 does not change. On the other hand, the upper starting winning device 1431 has a very low probability that a part of the game ball entered from the entrance 1611 is formed at a predetermined position without entering the starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B. It has a function of discharging from the outlet to a collection and discharge passage (not shown). That is, a part of the game ball that has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 through the entrance 1611 is discharged to the collecting and discharging passage without entering any of the left and right starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B. In addition, the probability that the game ball entered from the entrance 1611 is discharged to the collection and discharge passage without entering the start winning devices 1431A and 1431B is, for example, about 1/100, and preferably about 1/1000. It may be.

  The lower starting winning device 1432 is a starting device according to the second special symbol, similarly to the right starting winning device 432. Like the right start winning device 432, the lower starting winning device 1432 has a mechanism for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof. It is not necessary to provide the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball only in the lower starting winning device 1432, and instead or in addition to the above, one or other of the other winning devices such as the upper starting winning device 1431. A plurality may be provided. Further, the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid or the like, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operates mechanically.

  Like the right starting winning device 432, the lower starting winning device 1432 includes an entry restricting mechanism 1452 that changes a probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by transitioning between an entry allowable position and an entry prohibiting position, and an entry restricting device. An entry control solenoid (not shown) for driving the mechanism 1452 is provided. The entry control solenoid that drives the entry control mechanism 1452 is connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the right entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10). In the following, the above-described entry control solenoid that drives the entry control mechanism 1452 is also referred to as an “entry control solenoid 1462” for convenience.

  The entry control mechanism 1452 includes two movable pieces driven by the entry control solenoid 1462. When the entry control mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces narrow the entrance (winning opening). The game ball cannot enter the lower starting prize winning device 1432 by taking the (or closing) arrangement, but when the entry restricting mechanism 1452 is in the entry allowable posture, the two movable pieces are separated by the distance between their tip portions. The game ball can enter the lower starting prize winning device 1432 by adopting an arrangement in which is enlarged.

  The entry control mechanism 1452 is used when a game ball that has entered the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 1446 (hereinafter also referred to as a “normal symbol lottery”). Then, in response to the drive by the entry restriction solenoid 1462, the state is shifted to the entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  The large prize winning device 1434, like the upper winning prize winning device 434, has an entry restriction mechanism 1454 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the inside thereof by a transition between an entry allowable position and an entry prohibited position, And an entry control solenoid (not shown) for changing the attitude. The entry control solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry control mechanism 1454 is connected to the main control board 920, similarly to the upper entry control solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10). In the following, the above-described entry control solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry control mechanism 1454 is also referred to as “entry control solenoid 1464” for convenience.

  The entry control mechanism 1454 includes a plate-shaped movable piece that is disposed on the front side of the big winning device 1434 and is driven by the entry control solenoid 1464. When the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition position, Since the movable piece closes the entrance (winning opening), the game ball cannot enter the large winning device 1434, but when the entry control mechanism 1454 is in the entry allowable posture, the movable piece moves forward with the lower side as an axis. By being pushed down and opening the entrance, the game ball can enter the special winning device 1434.

  The large prize winning device 1434 allows a game ball to enter when a winning lottery is won. Specifically, when a game ball that has entered the left start winning device 1431A related to the first special symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the left start winning switch 1441A (that is, a first special symbol lottery), or A lottery based on detection of a game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 1431B or the lower starting winning device 1432 according to the second special symbol by the right starting winning switch 1441B or the lower starting winning switch 1442 (that is, the second lottery). When the special symbol lottery is won, the entry control solenoid 1464 of the special winning device 1434 operates. By this operation, the entry control mechanism 1454 takes the entry allowed posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 24, a reel device 710 is provided in the opening of the central structure 420 on the game board 400 as a device for displaying a decorative symbol (variable display, stop display) instead of the decorative symbol display device 479. Is provided. The reel device 710 is attached to a plate-shaped base 701 arranged on the back side of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, the reel device 710 includes three rotating members arranged side by side in the left-right direction, that is, a left reel 711L, a middle reel 711M, and a right reel (right symbol row) formed in a cylindrical shape. ) 711R. Note that the left reel 711L forms a left symbol row, the middle reel 711M forms a middle symbol row, and the right reel 711R forms a right symbol row.

  Each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel 711L, 711M, 711R. The rotation axis of each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is disposed on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction.

  Each of these reels 711L, 711M, 711R is connected to a reel drive motor (not shown) composed of a stepping motor, and is rotated by the drive of each reel drive motor. In the following, for the sake of convenience, the drive motors for the respective reels connected to the left reel 711L, the middle reel 711M, and the right reel 711R are referred to as “reel drive motor 721L”, “reel drive motor 721M”, and “reel drive motor 721M”, respectively. Also referred to as “reel drive motor 721R”.

  The reel drive motors 721L, 721M, 721R are all connected to the sub-control board 940, and are independently driven by the control of the sub-control board 940. Thus, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can rotate individually, that is, independently.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, and by rotating these reels 711L, 711M, 711R individually, the decorative symbols are displayed. A variable display is realized. The decorative symbol is composed of a main symbol 712 and a sub symbol 713 formed smaller than the main symbol 712.

  The main symbol 712 is a symbol that can constitute a big hit symbol. The main design 712 is configured as a design including information (hereinafter, this information is referred to as “numerical information”) that defines individual numerical values, such as numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers, and is “1” in the present embodiment. To "9", and the big hit symbol is formed by a combination of three identical main symbols 712.

  The main symbols 712 are sequentially arranged such that each number from “1” to “9” goes around each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. More specifically, in the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, each of the main symbols 712 to which each numeral except for a part (specifically, “4”) among “1” to “9” is attached The reels 711L and 711R are arranged so as to change in a descending order when the reels 711L and 711R rotate clockwise as viewed from the front left side. On the other hand, in the middle reel 711M, each of the main symbols 712 to which each number from “1” to “9” is attached changes in ascending order when the middle reel 711M rotates clockwise as viewed from the front left side. Are arranged as follows. In addition, a configuration in which the sub-design 713 is arranged at a position corresponding to “4” will be described as an example, but the main design 712 with the number “4” is included in each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. Is also good.

  The sub symbol 713 is a symbol that cannot constitute a big hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the sub symbol 713 is configured as a symbol of a predetermined pattern that does not include numerical information. The sub-symbol 713 includes a first sub-symbol 713A provided on each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, and a second sub-symbol 713B provided only on the middle reel 711M as shown in FIG. .

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second sub-pattern 713B is arranged between the main symbol 712 with the number “3” and the main symbol 712 with the number “5” on the middle reel 711M. Is done. The second sub symbol 713B is provided in place of the symbol “4” in the main symbol 712, and is large in size so that the player can easily recognize it compared to the first sub symbol 713A as the other sub symbol 713. It is constituted by.

  The first sub-design 713A is a reel 711L, 711M, 711R except for a portion between the main design 712 with the number “3” and the main design 712 with the number “5” on the middle reel 711M. Are arranged between the main symbols 712 arranged in the.

  Each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is disposed with its front side protruding forward from the front surface of the base body 701, and has a substantially semicircular cross section when viewed from the front left side, and has a light transmissivity extending in the left-right direction. Is covered with a resin cover having The resin cover is configured as a light guide plate in which a predetermined decorative design (for example, a school of fish) is formed by fine irregularities on one surface side (for example, the back surface side), and at least one of the upper, lower, left and right sides (for example, By irradiating light from light-emitting portions (not shown) provided on both upper and lower sides, an image of the predetermined decorative design can be displayed so as to be visible from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400 includes a holding lamp 720 for displaying the number of times of holding the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), within the opening of the central structure 420. And is provided at a lower position with respect to the reel device 710. The holding lamp 720 is configured by a number (eight in the present embodiment) capable of emitting light corresponding to the sum of the upper limit values of the number of times of holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Specifically, a light emitting unit such as an LED is provided on the back side of each of the holding lamps 720, and the sub-control board 940 controls the light emitting unit. The unit is configured to be turned on or off. The holding lamp 720 is connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off according to the control by the sub-control board 940 according to the increase / decrease of the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol.

  In the gaming board 400, a lottery result display device 730 is provided in the opening of the central structure 420 and on the right side of the holding lamp 720. The lottery result display device 730 is a device that suggests to the player the lottery result of the reserved full effect by a variable display different from the variable display related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). (In this embodiment, four lamps). The lottery result display device 730 is connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off under the control of the sub-control board 940.

  Here, the operation of the lottery result display device 730 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device 730. In FIG. 26, the reel device 710 and the holding lamp 720 are shown together.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the lottery result display device 730 includes four lamps 730A to 730D. The first lamp 730A is the smallest lamp among the lamps 730A to 730D, and is arranged on the leftmost side. The second lamp 730B is the second smallest lamp, and is arranged on the right side of the first lamp 730A. The third lamp 730C is the second largest lamp, and is disposed on the right side of the second lamp 730B. The fourth lamp 730D is the largest lamp and is arranged on the right side of the third lamp 730C.

  While the decorative symbol is being displayed by the reel device 710, that is, while the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are rotating, the number of times of holding the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit. Then, as shown in FIG. 26A, the lottery result display device 730 displays one of the lamps 730A to 730D one by one in a rightward direction (arrow Q direction) from the first lamp 730A like a roulette wheel. After the lamp is illuminated so as to sequentially move, and after the fourth lamp 730D is illuminated, the display returns to the first lamp 730A again and repeats a pattern of sequentially moving rightward from the first lamp 730A and illuminating (hereinafter, this fluctuation display The display is also called “lamp fluctuation display”).

  The above-described lamp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730 indicates that the moving speed of the lighting lamps (lamp lighting intervals) in the lamps 730A to 730D fluctuates quickly, and then the moving speed gradually decreases, and the lamp fluctuation At the timing when a predetermined variable display time has elapsed from the start of the display, among the lamps 730A to 730D, the lamp corresponding to the lottery result of the hold full effect is turned on to finally stop (stop display).

  More specifically, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank production lottery, as shown in FIG. 26B, the lottery result display device 730 displays the lamps of the lamps 730A to 730D. After performing the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed by turning on the fourth lamp 730D. On the other hand, when the appearance of the reserved full effect is not selected in the reserved full effect lottery, the lottery result display device 730 displays a lamp other than the fourth lamp 730D, that is, the first lamp 730A and the second lamp 730B. , Or the third lamp 730C.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is determined after the reach display appears in the variation display of the decorative symbol performed on the reel device 710, and then the final display is performed. (Hereinafter, also referred to as a “reach effect period”), the variable display time of the variable display (ramp variable display) by the lottery result display device 730 is provided.

  Specifically, when the lottery result display device 730 starts ramp change display due to the number of unit games pertaining to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaching the upper limit, the ramp change display is displayed. On the other hand, the elapse timing of the predetermined basic variable display time (for example, 3 seconds) (that is, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730) is different from the reach in the decorative display variable display performed on the reel device 710. In the case of the effect period, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display is extended.

  The sub-control board 940 is executing when the lottery result display device 730 starts the ramp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730 when the number of hold times of the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit. It is determined whether the variable display of the decorative symbol is a variable display including the reach display.

  Next, when the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is the variable display including the reach display, the sub-control board 940 determines whether the lamp variable display is performed for the basic variable display time. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the lottery result display device 730 during the reach effect period in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed.

  Further, the sub-control board 940 determines in the above-described determination that the timing to stop and display on the lottery result display device 730 during the reach effect period in the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed arrives. The variable display time of the lamp variable display is extended so that the stop display timing comes after the end of the reach effect period in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed (that is, after the final display is performed).

  For example, the lamp fluctuation display is changed so that the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the timing at which the final display is displayed in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol being executed. Extend the variable display time. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be extended so that the stop display time comes on the lottery result display device 730 at the timing when the final display is displayed in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol being executed.

  Alternatively, a period from the timing when the lamp variation display is stopped and displayed on the lottery result display device 730 when only the basic variation display time is displayed to the timing when the fixed display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed ( Hereinafter, this period is also referred to as “reach effect remaining period”), and the variable display time of the lamp variable display may be extended by a uniform time. In such a case, for example, if the remaining reach effect period is 5 seconds or less, the change display time of the lamp change display is extended by 6 seconds, and if the reach effect remaining period is 5 seconds or more and 10 seconds or less, the lamp change display is not changed. The variable display time may be extended by 11 seconds.

  Next, a look-ahead effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the "look-ahead effect" is a kind of suggestive effect, and when the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is reserved, the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the reservation is performed. Based on the result, an effect of giving a preview of a specific game state (for example, a special game state) that occurs after the end of the unit game performed by the suspension of the hold.

  Here, as a look-ahead effect that gives a preview of a specific game state that occurs after the end of the unit game, an effect that always transitions to a specific game state when the effect occurs, or the effect In some cases, the game may transition to a specific game state when the game has occurred, but may be performed even when the game does not transit to a specific game state.The production may be such that the player expects the transition to the specific game state. including. In addition, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the effect of notifying the specific game state that occurs immediately after the end of the unit game in which the effect was executed, and the specific game state that occurs after at least one variation display is performed. It may be a production that gives notice.

  FIGS. 27 and 28 are schematic diagrams showing the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the second sub-symbol advance notice is performed. FIG. 29 is the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the countdown notice is performed. FIG.

  Each of the second sub-symbol advance notice and the countdown advance notice is a kind of look-ahead effect. The sub-control board 940 determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect based on the predetermined effect object information received from the main control board 920, and what kind of a look-ahead effect to execute when performing the look-ahead effect. decide.

  Specifically, when a special winning (a first special symbol or a second special symbol) starts winning, the main control board 920 determines whether the special winning (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is generated based on the value of the random number acquired based on the occurrence of the starting winning. The corresponding special symbol lottery is performed, and the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is determined. This determination is made before the start of the variable display executed based on the start winning. The main control board 920 includes information corresponding to whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery has been won (hereinafter, also referred to as “prize / failure correspondence information”), and a determined or determined variable display time. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “variable display time correspondence information”) as rendering target information, and outputs a command including the rendering target information to the sub-control board 940.

  Here, the production target information may be information selected or determined by the main control board 920 based on the value of a random number acquired based on the occurrence of a winning prize, for example, information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred and fluctuations. The information indicating the display time may be the production target information, for example, information indicating the rough change display time such as whether or not the change display including the reach display as the change display time is output as the change display time corresponding information. Is also good. In addition, the acquired random number value itself is used as production target information, and the main control board 920 outputs the acquired random number value itself to the sub control board 940, and the same selection is made for both the main control board 920 and the sub control board 940. It may be configured to include a control for determining a lottery result of the special symbol lottery and a variable display time by a method.

  Note that the command including the effect target information may be a hold command or a command dedicated to outputting the effect target information. Further, the effect target information may not include the variable display time correspondence information, and may be configured only with the success / failure information. When receiving the production target information from the main control substrate 920, the sub-control board 940, based on the production target information and the number of times the right of the unit game pertaining to the special symbol has been reserved, determines the unit game corresponding to the production target information. It is determined whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect for giving a notice of a game state occurring after the end. When determining to execute the look-ahead effect, the sub-control board 940 determines the type of the look-ahead effect to be executed. When the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined, the special game unit game corresponding to the effect object information corresponding to the look-ahead effect is also referred to as “variable display of the look-ahead object”.

  First, with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the second sub-symbol predictor notice will be described. In the second sub-symbol advance notice, after the loss symbol including the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is displayed as a stop symbol on the middle line L2, which is one of the effective lines, the variable display of the prefetch target is executed. This is a look-ahead effect in which the middle reel 711M is kept stationary without fluctuating (rotating). The control of the second sub-symbol advance notice is performed by the sub-control board 940, and the control of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R described below is performed by the sub-control board 940.

  The “effective line” is a line that transitions to the special game state when a big hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol on the line. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the uppermost upper line L1, the lowermost lower line L3, and the middle line L2 between the upper line L1 and the lower line L3. Valid line is set. Note that the number of active lines is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be more, such as five active lines including two diagonally upward and downward diagonal active lines, or a small number, such as only the middle line L2. May be.

  For example, when a special symbol to be prefetched is activated in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2, as shown in FIG. 27, the variable display immediately before the prefetch object is started as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the variable display ends when the lost symbol including the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 which is one of the activated lines as a stopped symbol.

  More specifically, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R that fluctuate in the fluctuation display immediately before the prefetch target is stopped in a state where the middle reel 711M displays the second sub-symbol 713B on the middle line L2. To control. Since the second sub symbol 713B is a symbol that does not constitute a big hit symbol, the large hit symbol is not stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 by displaying the second sub symbol 713B on the middle line L2. The player is informed that the lost symbol has already been stopped and displayed as the stop symbol that is stopped and displayed in L2.

  When the middle reel 711M stops, the left reel 711M is controlled to stop in a state where the main symbol 712 is displayed on the middle line L2. In each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, the main symbol 712 and the sub symbol 713 (713A, 713B) are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. In this state, the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711R is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, so that the symbol of the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711R in any of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3. The reach display is not formed with the symbol of, and the player is shown that the lost symbol has already been stopped and displayed on all the activated lines L1 to L3.

  After the left reel 711L stops, control is performed so that the right reel 711R stops. The right reel 711R controls the stop symbol displayed on the middle line L2 differently depending on whether the display is a variable display of a prefetch target or a variable display performed before the prefetch target. In the case of the variable display performed before the prefetch target, control is performed such that the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol 713 which does not become the reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2 is stopped. I do. Therefore, in the fluctuation display two objects ahead of the prefetching target, a state where the reach display is not formed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R is shown to the player in any of the activated lines, and the fluctuation display is stopped in a loss pattern. indicate.

  After the end of the fluctuation display two objects before the prefetch target, the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display immediately before the prefetch target) in the unit game of the special symbol held next is started. In the variation display, the left and right reels 711L, 711L, 711L, 711M are stopped while the middle reel 711M is not varied (rotated) (that is, while the state in which the second sub-pattern 713B is displayed on the middle line L2). The fluctuation of 711R is started.

  In addition, "the state in which the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing (rotating)" is not limited to the case where the middle reel 711M is completely stopped, and the second sub-design 713B is within a predetermined range including the middle line L2. It may be accompanied by an operation such as swinging, for example, in a state where the second sub-pattern 713B is moving up and down and stopped within a range overlapping in a front view with a virtual straight line as the middle line L2. Alternatively, this state may be a state where the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing (rotating).

  First, the left and right reels 711L and 711R that fluctuate in the fluctuation display immediately before the prefetch target are controlled so that the left reel 711L stops in a state where any of the main symbols 812 is displayed on the middle line L2. Therefore, also in the variable display, similarly to the above-described variable display immediately before the prefetching target, it is determined that the loss symbol has already been stopped and displayed on all the activated lines while the right reel 711R is displaying the variable. The display of the reach display is suppressed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

  Here, in the pre-reading effect in the present embodiment, only the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are changed, and whether the reach display is formed by these two reels 711L and 711R, and whether the reach display is performed. In order to allow the player to pay attention to whether the main reel 712M is formed by the main symbol 712, the fluctuation display is set so as not to change the middle reel 711M. In this case, if a part of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711M, the player recognizes that the effect is to pay attention to the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R. There is a possibility that a reach display is formed by the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, and that it is expected to develop into a special effect. For this reason, during execution of the look-ahead effect, when the left reel 711L stops, control is performed so that the reach display is not formed depending on the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

  Note that the look-ahead effect is controlled by changing the probability (expected degree) of transition to the special game state according to how many times before the time-varying display and the look-ahead effect are started with respect to the variable display of the look-ahead target. It is preferable to control so that the probability of the transition to the special game state (expected degree) is set to be higher as the number of times the variable display is continuously executed is large, and a main symbol 712 as a big hit symbol is set. The number of award balls (for example, the number of rounds) that can be obtained by the player in the special game state is set differently according to the type of the special game state, or the game state that transits after the special game state is the main symbol 712 as a big hit symbol. It is preferable to set differently according to the type so that the type of the main symbol 712 constituting the reach display stopped and displayed on the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R in the look-ahead effect can be noticed. Arbitrariness.

  After the left reel 711L is stopped, the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol which does not become the reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2, similarly to the variable display before the variable display being executed. The right reel 711R is controlled to stop so that 713 is stopped and displayed. Thereby, in the variable display immediately before the prefetch target, similarly to the above-described variable display before the prefetch target, reach of each of the activated lines L1, L2, and L3 is performed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. A state in which no display is formed is shown to the player, and the variable display is stopped and displayed in a lost pattern.

  Here, as the stop control of the right reel 711R during the pre-reading effect, the player can take time to pay attention to whether the reach display is performed in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L or not. The main symbol 712 (the same main symbol 712 in the present embodiment) of the right reel 711R, which can form a reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L, is placed near the middle line L2 and slightly on the upper side. To move slowly, and control so as to be even slower so that it is likely to stop where it overlaps the middle line L2. Then, in the fluctuation display before the pre-reading target, the main symbol 712 moves from the state where it seems to stop where it overlaps the middle line L2 to the lower side, and the main symbol 712 stops at the lower line L3, and the middle line L2 May be controlled so that the sub-symbol 713 stops.

  After the end of the variable display immediately before the prefetch target, the variable display of the prefetch target is started. Also in the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are fluctuated in a state where the middle reel 711M is stopped without fluctuating, similarly to the fluctuation display immediately before the prefetch target described above.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the left and right reels 711L and 711R that fluctuate in the fluctuating display of the prefetch target are controlled to form a reach display on the middle line L2 and stop the display. For example, in the variation display of the prefetch target, like the above variation display before the prefetch target, it is likely that the main symbol 712, which is the same as the main symbol 712 stopped on the left reel 711L, overlaps with the middle line L2. It may be controlled so that the speed becomes even slower, and then, from a state where it is likely to stop where it overlaps the middle line L2, the main symbol 712 and the main symbol 712 are stopped at the middle line L2.

  After the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed while forming the reach display in the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, the fluctuation of the middle reel 711M is started, and thereafter, the fluctuation of the prefetch target is performed by stopping the middle reel 711M. The display ends. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 due to the stop of the middle reel 711M, the game state transits to the special game state after the stop display (ie, after the end of the variable display of the prefetch target). . On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 due to the stop of the middle reel 711M, the game state is changed to the normal game state without transitioning to the special game state after the stop display.

  In addition, as for the second sub-symbol advance notice, in the above description, the case where the special winning of the special symbol to be pre-read is generated in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2 is described. When a special symbol to be pre-read is generated in a state where the number of retained games is one, or when a special symbol to be pre-read is generated in a state where the number of reserved special game units is three or more, a special winning to be pre-read is performed. In the case of occurrence, a second sub-symbol precursor warning may be similarly provided.

  Next, a countdown notice will be described with reference to FIG. The countdown notice is a look-ahead effect in which, in the variable display prior to the variable display of the prefetch target, the number of variable displays performed until the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is counted down by the number included in the main symbol 812. . The control of the countdown notice is performed by the sub-control board 940.

  For example, when a special symbol to be pre-read is activated in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. 29, the variable display three times before the pre-read target is started as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the variable display is stopped after the main symbol 712 with the number “3” on the middle reel 711M is positioned in the middle line L2, and then the left and right reels 711L and 711R are displayed on the respective effective lines L1 and L2. , L3, the stop symbol is stopped so as to become a lost symbol.

  After the end of the fluctuation display three times before the prefetch target, the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display two before the prefetch target) in the unit game of the special symbol held next is started. The fluctuation display is performed after the main symbol 712 with the number “2” on the middle reel 711M is stopped in a state where the main symbol 712 is positioned on the middle line L2, and then the left and right reels 711L and 711R are respectively activated lines L1, L2 and L3. In this case, the process is terminated by stopping the stop symbol so as to become a lost symbol.

  After the end of the fluctuation display two objects ahead of the prefetch target, the fluctuation display immediately before the prefetch object starts, and the main part 712 of the middle reel 711M with the number “1” is a middle line. After being stopped in the state of being located at L2, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped so that the stop symbol becomes a lost symbol in each of the effective lines L1, L2 and L3, and the process is ended.

  After the end of the variable display immediately before the prefetch target, the variable display of the prefetch target is started, and the big hit symbol or the lost symbol is stopped as a stop symbol. In the variable display of the prefetch target, the stop is performed in the order of the left reel 711L, the right reel 711R, and the middle reel 711M.

  In the above description, the countdown notice is described above in the case where the special symbol to be prefetched is activated when the number of reserved special game unit games is 3, but the number of reserved special game unit games is not limited. In the case where the special prize to be pre-read is generated in a state where is 2, or the case where the special prize to be pre-read is generated in a state where the number of hold times of the unit game of the special symbol is 4 or more. May also be configured to give a countdown notice in the same manner. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a countdown notice is given when a special symbol to be prefetched and a winning start occurs in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is two.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times the special symbol is held reaches the upper limit, the lamp change display is performed for a predetermined change display time on the lottery result display device 730, and then the lamps 730A to 730D are turned on. Since the lottery result of the hold full effect lottery is notified by the position of the lamp that is stopped and displayed, the sense of expectation for the execution of the hold full effect can be favorably amplified during the period in which the ramp fluctuation display is executed. .

  In particular, since the position of the stop-displayed lamp is different between the case where the appearance of the hold full effect is selected and the case where the appearance of the hold full effect is not selected in the hold full effect lottery, The user can easily and intuitively judge whether or not the appearance of the hold full effect has been selected based on the position of the stop-displayed lamp. In addition, since the stop display for reporting the lottery result of the holding full tank production lottery is performed within the range of the lamps 730A to 730D constituting the lottery result display device 730, the player's line of sight is It is difficult to disperse, and the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result display device 730 displays the lottery result of the reserved full effect production lottery, a stop display (that is, the display of the lottery result of the reserved full production effect lottery) is performed. The timing is configured to deviate from the reach effect period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 from being performed during an effect that the player wants to pay attention to, such as a suggestion effect performed during the reach effect period. As a result, the player's interest can be concentrated on the effects such as the suggestion effects performed during the reach effect period, so that the player's expectation of the fluctuation display during the execution by the suggestion effects is appropriately improved. Can be done. In addition, since the display time of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 does not overlap with the display time of the suggestion effect, the player may miss the lottery result of the held full tank effect lottery displayed by the lottery result display device 730. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the second sub-symbol precursor notice, after the loss symbol including the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, it is displayed before the fluctuation display of the prefetch target. In the variation display executed on the left and right, the variation display of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is performed while the middle reel 711M is stopped, so that the player can change the left and right reels 711L and 711R. By the start of the display, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the lottery result with respect to the variable display of the prefetch target that comes after that.

  In particular, the middle reel 711M, which has been stopped from the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, starts to fluctuate in synchronization with the formation of the reach display on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. It strongly impresses that the end time of the variable display of the prefetch target (that is, the display of the lottery result with respect to the variable display of the prefetch target) is approached, thereby further increasing the expectation of the lottery result with respect to the variable display of the prefetch target. be able to.

  Further, in the second sub-symbol precursor notice, the middle reel 711M stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R is subsequently synchronized with the formation of the reach display on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Therefore, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the changing middle reel 711M in the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, and it is possible to appropriately increase the expectation of the lottery result for the fluctuation display of the prefetch target. .

  In the second sub-symbol advance notice, the second sub-symbol 713B that is continuously stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display of the prefetch target constitutes a big hit symbol. Since the symbol is not displayed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the variable display performed before the variable display of the prefetch target, that is, before the variable display of the prefetch target is performed. .

  In the second sub-symbol advance notice, a part of the symbol that does not constitute the big hit symbol, such as the second sub-symbol 713B, is displayed in the middle symbol row of the middle line L2 in the variation display before the variation display of the prefetch target. On the middle reel 711M), the variable display is continued for the entire period of the variable display, so that the player recognizes that the big hit symbol is not displayed on the middle line L2 in the variable display prior to the variable display of the prefetch target, and thereby, thereafter, , The expectation for the variable display of the look-ahead to be read can be further increased.

  In particular, in the second sub-symbol precursor notice, the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle line L2 is the second sub-symbol 713B provided solely on the middle reel 711M among the sub-symbols 713. Therefore, it is easy to attract the player's attention, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the second sub-symbol precursor warning has started. Further, in the second sub-symbol precursor notice of the present embodiment, the second sub-symbol 713B is a middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle line L2 located at the center among the plurality of activated lines L1, L2, L3. In this regard, it is easy to attract the player's attention also in this regard, and to make the player easily aware that the second sub-symbol predictor notice has been started.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the countdown notice, in the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, the number of variable displays performed until the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is determined by the middle reel 711M. The player counts down by the number included in the main symbol 812 of the main symbol 812, so that the player visually recognizes the main symbol 812 of the middle reel 711M in the variable display during execution until the variable display of the prefetch target is executed thereafter. It is possible to know the number of times of the variable display to be executed. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target that gradually approaches.

  Further, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of the variable display performed before the variable display of the prefetch target is performed is performed by changing the main symbol 712 of the reel for displaying the decorative symbols (the main symbol 712 and the sub symbol 713) in a variable manner. Since the countdown is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the countdown.

  Also, in the countdown notice, the middle reel 711M, which counts down the number of times of the variable display performed before the variable display of the prefetch target is performed, is stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Since the reel to be performed (middle reel 711M) is easily distinguished from other reels (left and right reels 711L and 711R), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the countdown.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a plate-shaped member having light transmissivity (light transmission), and the characteristics of the base 401 are used to entertain the game. It is designed to enhance In the following description, the same components as those in the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, the display area of the reel device 710 exceeds the display area of the reel device 710 by using the display area in which the reel apparatus 710 can be visually recognized in a front view and the outer part thereof by using the base 401 having light transmittance. A school of fish as an example of a luminous display for an effect displayed as follows will be described. FIG. 30A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device 710 in the gaming board 400X, and FIG. 30B is a simplified main configuration of the gaming board 400X along the line AA in FIG. FIG. FIG. 31A is a simplified cross-sectional view of a main configuration including the reel device 710 taken along the line BB in FIG. 30A, and FIG. It is a front view for explaining the fish school displayed by it.

  30 (a), 30 (b), and 31 (b), illustration of the central structure 420 is omitted. In FIG. 30B, for reference, a part of the nail 411 provided on the base 401 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. 223 is indicated by a chain line. In FIG. 31A, the back plate 223 is shown by a dashed line for reference. In addition, in FIGS. 30B and 31A, hatching of the cross section is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a light-transmitting flat plate-shaped member. As shown in FIG. 30A, an opening 401D that forms an opening to which the central structure 420 is attached is formed in the base 401. The central structure 420 is made of a light-transmissive resin material so that a part of the fish school displayed on the back side is attached by being fitted into the opening 401D from the front so as to be visible. In FIG. 30, illustration is omitted.

  On the front surface of the base 401, a picture pattern 741 of a fish constituting a part of a school of fish (fish school) facing leftward is drawn in various sizes on the left and right sides of the reel device 710. It is drawn by printing a colored paint having light properties. The fish pattern 741 drawn on the base 401 includes a pattern that is partially interrupted by the periphery (edge) of the opening 401D, like the pattern 741A.

  The base 701 disposed on the back side of the game board 400 is also configured as a plate-like member having optical transparency, like the base 401. As shown in FIG. 30 (a), on the front surface of the base 701, a part of a school of fish facing the left side together with the fish drawn by the picture 741, inside the opening 401D and on the left and right sides with respect to the reel device 710. Are drawn in various sizes.

  The pattern 742 of the fish drawn on the base 701 is a pair with a pattern 741 (for example, the pattern 741A) which is only a part of the fish itself but is partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D, like the pattern 742A. It also includes a picture that constitutes one fish when viewed from the front.

  Further, the fish pattern 742 drawn on the base 701 includes a pattern that is partially interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710, such as the patterns 742B, 742C, and 742D. In addition, the pattern 742B drawn on the left side of the resin cover 715 and the pattern 742D drawn on the right side of the resin cover 715 may be one side and the other side of the pattern in which one fish is divided into right and left, Thereby, it can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily understand that the pattern represents a fish school as an integrated object continuously in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 30B, a panel light emitting device 490A, which is a part of the panel light emitting device 490, is provided on the back side of the base 401. The panel light-emitting device 490A is arranged such that the light-emitting means E1 such as an LED can emit light toward the front where the base 401 is located. Therefore, by turning on (emitting) the light emitting means E1 disposed on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 741 is drawn on the base 401, the pattern 741 floating in the light can be displayed.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the base 701, a panel light emitting device 490B, which is a part of the panel light emitting device 490, is provided. The panel light emitting device 490B includes a light emitting means E2 such as an LED and a light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31A) directed toward the base 701. Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E2 disposed on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 742 is drawn on the base body 701, the pattern 742 floating in the light can be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30B, between the opening 401D of the base 401 and the periphery of the base 701, a light-transmitting plate-shaped member extending in the front-rear direction substantially perpendicular to the bases 401 and 701 is provided. Are provided. On the surface of the side wall portion 702 (the surface facing the inside of the opening 401D), a pattern 741 (for example, the pattern 741A) partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D, and a pattern 742 (for example, the pattern 742A) paired with the pattern 741 ) Are drawn (not shown). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fish constituted by the combination of the pattern 741 and the pattern 742 from being cut off by the step between the base 401 and the base 701.

  A panel light emitting device 490C, which is a part of the panel light emitting device 490, is provided on the back side of the side wall portion 702 (outside the opening 401D). The panel light-emitting device 490C includes a light-emitting unit E3 such as an LED provided to be able to irradiate light toward the side wall 702. Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E3 disposed on the back side of the area on the side wall portion 702 where the pattern is drawn, the pattern floating in the light can be displayed.

  The resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is a light-transmitting (light-transmitting) cover that covers the front side of each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. As shown in FIG. 31A, the resin cover 715 of this embodiment is formed in an arc shape whose side cross section is curved along the cross section of each reel such as the middle reel 711M. The resin cover 715 includes a light-transmitting outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701, and a light guide plate 715B disposed on the rear side of the outer cover 715A.

  In the light guide plate 715B, on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of a resin plate having optical transparency, a picture pattern 743 of a fish constituting a part of a fish school facing left is formed by fine irregularities. The light emitting means E4 such as an LED provided on the panel light emitting device 490B is arranged along the upper end of the light guide plate 715B above the upper end thereof, and along the lower end of the light guide plate 715B below the lower end thereof. Are arranged.

  When the light emitting means E4 is not turned on, the light guide plate 715B allows the back side to be seen from the front side, and the player can use the resin cover 715 (the outer cover 715A and the light guide plate 715B) as shown in FIG. , The reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be visually recognized. On the other hand, when the light emitting means E4 is turned on, the light emitted from the light emitting means E4 enters the upper and lower ends of the light guide plate 715B, whereby the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) is placed on the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715). As shown in (b), a picture 743 of a fish constituting a part of the fish school is displayed.

  The fish pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B is a pattern in which only a part of the fish is drawn by itself, like the patterns 743B and 743C, but is partially cut off by the boundary with the resin cover 715. 742 (for example, patterns 742B and 742C), and a pattern constituting one fish when viewed from the front is also included.

  A pattern 743 such as the patterns 743B and 743C, which constitute one fish in combination with the pattern 742 partially cut off by the boundary with the resin cover 715, is a predetermined pattern below the top of the resin cover 715 located at the forefront. Are formed so as to be displayed within the range of the regions R1 and R2.

  The “predetermined region” is, for example, two-fifths of the height difference (height in the front-rear direction) between the top of the resin cover 715 (the top of the outer cover 715A) and the upper and lower ends of the outer cover 715A. It is a lower region, preferably a region below 1/2 from the top side in the elevation difference, and may be a region below 3/5 from the top side in the elevation difference. Further, the end of the “predetermined region” on the side of the base 701 may or may not be in contact with the base 701, but is preferably in contact with the base 701.

  Since the regions R1 and R2 have a shorter distance from the surface (front surface) of the base 701 than the vicinity of the top of the resin cover 715, a pattern 742 (for example, the pattern 742B, 742C) and a pattern 743 (for example, the patterns 743B and 743C) paired with the pattern 742 can be kept low. Therefore, since the distortion when the pair of the patterns 742 and 743 are viewed from the front can be suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult for a fish pattern formed by the pair of the pattern 742 and the pattern 743 to feel uncomfortable.

  Here, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710 has a shape that bulges in an arc shape toward the front side when viewed from the side, and the light guide plate 715B (the resin cover 715) also has a reel 711L, 711M, and 711R. Is formed in a shape that swells in a circular arc shape toward the front side along the shape of the surface. For this reason, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711L is positioned so as to be located between the base 401 forming the game area in which the game ball flows down and the transparent plate (rear plate 223) located on the front side thereof or near the front thereof. Even when the front ends of the light guide plate 715B and the light guide plate 715B (the resin cover 715) are arranged, the upper and lower ends of the display area of the reel device 710 that can be viewed in front view are shifted rearward from the front surface of the base 401. It will be. The base 701 is arranged in a plane so as to be substantially the same front and rear ends as the upper and lower ends of a display area of the reel device 710 which can be visually recognized in a front view, and thereby the fish displayed on the light guide plate 715B. The sense of unity between the picture 743 and the picture 742 displayed on the base 701 can be expressed, and the symbols of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R located inside the base 701 when viewed from the player side are displayed on the base 701. It can be displayed in an emphasized manner in comparison with the picture 742 to be displayed, and the result of the success or failure can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to lighting the light emitting means E4 to display the fish pattern 743 on the light guide plate 715B, by turning on the light emitting means E1 to E3, the fish school which faces to the left can be formed. The image can be displayed in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. At this time, by controlling the lighting timing of the light emitting units E1 to E4, it is possible to perform an effect in which the school of fish moves from right to left in a wide area sandwiching the reel device 710.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a description will be given of a configuration in which a player can visually recognize a flow path of a game ball that has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

  FIG. 32A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the upper and lower starting winning devices 1431 and 1432 in the gaming board 400X of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 32 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board 400X taken along the line CC of FIG. 32 (a), and FIG. 32 (c) is a top view of FIG. 32 (a) viewed from above. FIG. 32D is a diagram showing how the information display section 753 looks when a player who is playing the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment views the lower left direction obliquely.

  In FIG. 32A, the distribution unit 1620 is schematically illustrated. In FIG. 32 (c), the right side of the upper starting winning device 1431 is omitted, and the upper surfaces of the guide passage 1612, the first passages 1613A and 1613B, and the second subsidiary passage 1614A are omitted.

  In addition, in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c), the nails 411 are shown, except for the nails 411A (part of the nails 411) arranged in a downward direction from the upper side of the information display portion 753 on the left side as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. And the illustration of the lower starting winning device 1432 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 32B, for reference, one of the nails 411A is illustrated including a portion buried in the base 401, and the other nail 411A is a portion protruding forward of the base 401. The back plate 223 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 32 (c), for reference, a portion of the nail 411A protruding forward of the base 401 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the rear plate 223 is shown by a one-dot chain line.

  32 (b) and 32 (c), for reference, a part of the game ball entering the upper starting prize device 1431 from the entrance 1611 is shown, and a part of the game ball in the upper starting prize device 1431 is shown. Are shown by arrows.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c), on the back side (rear side) of the base 401 of the game board 400X, a game ball which has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 to the distribution unit 1620. A guide passage 1612 for guiding the game ball, left and right first passages 1613A and 1613B through which the game balls distributed by the distribution unit 1620 flow, and second passages 1614A and 1614B branched from the left and right first passages 1613A and 1613B, respectively. Is provided.

  Each of these passages 1612, 1613A, 1613B, 1614A, 1614B is formed by a passage forming member 1631 provided on the back side (rear side) of the base 401, as shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c). You. The passage forming member 1631 is made of a light-transmitting resin.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c), the guide passage 1612 penetrates the base 401 so as to guide game balls (for example, game balls P1) entered from the entrance 1611 to the back side of the base 401. A path that guides the game ball downward above the distribution unit 1620 after being guided from the formed opening 401 </ b> C to a position above the distribution unit 1620 toward the back (rearward side).

  The game balls that have passed through the guide passage 1612 are distributed by the distribution unit 1620. Note that the distribution unit 1620 corresponds to the distribution unit of the upper starting winning device 1431 in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. That is, the distribution unit 1620 alternately switches the distribution destination each time a game ball enters from the entrance 1611, similarly to the distribution unit 620.

  Specifically, the distribution unit 1620 transfers the game ball guided by the guide passage 1612 to the left first passage 1613A located on the left side of the distribution unit 1620 in the game machine front view, or in the game machine front view. It is alternately distributed to the right first passage 1613B located on the right side with respect to the distribution unit 1620.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the left first passage 1613A is an upstream passage 1613A1 that constitutes an upstream passage in the left first passage 1613A, and a game ball that has passed through the upstream passage 1613A1 is described later. And a downstream passage 1613A2 through which game balls that have not entered the left second passage 1614A flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 32C, the upstream passage 1613A1 guides the game balls (for example, the game balls P2) distributed to the left by the distribution unit 1620 to the left side, and then moves to the back side (rear side). This is a path that guides, and then guides in a substantially vertical downward direction (vertically from the front to the back in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 32C).

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32C, the downstream passage 1613A2 is a passage provided downstream of the inlet of the left second passage 1614A branched from the upstream passage 1613A1. The downstream passage 1613A2 guides the game ball guided substantially vertically downward by the upstream passage 1613A1 to the collection / discharge passage (not shown) after continuously guiding the game ball substantially vertically downward.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C, the left second passage 1614A is a passage that is formed by branching leftward in a downwardly extending portion of the upstream passage 1613A1. The left second passage 1614A guides a game ball (for example, a game ball P3) entered from the left first passage 1613A (upstream passage 1613A1) to the left, and then guides the ball substantially vertically downward like the game ball P4. Then, it is guided to the collection and discharge passage.

  The probability that the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the second left passage 1614A is extremely lower than the probability that the game ball enters the downstream passage 1613A2. The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the left second passage 1614A is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the left start winning switch 1441A is provided so as to detect a game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613A2. Therefore, when a game ball passing through the left first passage 1613A enters the downstream passage 1613A2 from the upstream passage 1613A1, the game ball is detected by the left start winning switch 1441A.

  Therefore, the game ball distributed to the left first passage 1613A by the distribution unit 1620 enters the left starting prize device 1431A by passing through the downstream passage 1613A2, and is detected by the left starting prize switch 1441A to be subjected to the first special. The winning start of the symbol.

  On the other hand, when a game ball passing through the left first passage 1613A enters the left second passage 1614A from the upstream passage 1613A1, the game ball is not detected by the left start winning switch 1441A. Therefore, if the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the second passage 1614A on the left without entering the downstream passage 1613A2, the first special symbol does not win.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32A, the right first passage 1613B includes an upstream passage 1613B1 constituting an upstream passage of the right first passage 1613B and a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1. A downstream passage 1613B2 through which a game ball that has not entered the right second passage 1614B described below flows down.

  As shown in FIG. 32C, the upstream passage 1613B1 guides the game balls distributed to the right side by the distribution unit 1620 to the right side, and then goes to the back side (rear side) like the upstream side passage 1613A1. , And then a path that is guided substantially vertically downward.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the downstream passage 1613B2 is a passage provided downstream of the inlet of the second right passage 1614B that branches off from the upstream passage 1613B1. The downstream passage 1613B2 guides the game ball guided substantially vertically downward by the upstream passage 1613B1 to the collection / discharge passage after being continuously guided substantially vertically downward.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the right-side second passage 1614B is a passage formed to branch rightward at a portion extending downward in the upstream-side passage 1613B1. The second right passage 1614B guides the game ball that has entered from the first right passage 1613B (upstream passage 1613B1) to the right, then to the substantially vertical downward direction, and then to the collection and discharge passage.

  The probability that the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B is set to be extremely lower than the probability that the game ball enters the downstream passage 1613B2. The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the right start winning switch 1441B is provided so as to be able to detect a game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613B2. Therefore, when a game ball passing through the right first passage 1613B enters the downstream passage 1613B2 from the upstream passage 1613B1, the game ball is detected by the right start winning switch 1441B.

  Therefore, the game ball distributed to the right first passage 1613B by the distribution unit 1620 enters the right starting winning device 1431B by passing through the downstream passage 1613B2, is detected by the right starting winning switch 1441B, and is detected by the second special winning switch 1441B. The winning start of the symbol.

  On the other hand, when a game ball passing through the right first passage 1613B enters the right second passage 1614B from the upstream passage 1613B1, the game ball is not detected by the right start winning switch 1441B. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B without entering the downstream passage 1613B2, the start winning of the second special symbol is not obtained.

  A region J in the base 401 corresponds to a region surrounded by a thick line in FIG. 32A, and an image such as the above-described pattern 741 is not drawn in this range, and a region where an image or the like is drawn. It is configured as a region having high visibility when viewing the rear side from the front side as compared with. As shown in FIG. 32A, the region J includes the entire left and right upstream passages 1613A1 and 1613B1 and the front side of each of the left and right downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 and a part of the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B. Is provided at a position overlapping with.

  As described above, the passage forming member 1631 forming each of the passages 1613A1, 1613B1, 1613A2, 1613B2, 1614A, and 1614B is made of a resin having a light transmitting property. The flowing path of the game ball that has entered the 1431 can be visually recognized through the area J of the base 401.

  Therefore, when the game ball enters the entrance 1611, the player visually recognizes the flow path of the game ball through the area J of the base 401, and the game ball can be moved to the left or right by the distribution unit 1620. , And whether the vehicle has entered a passage in which a special symbol starting prize is generated (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32A, information display units 751 to 754 for notifying a player of a characteristic area on the game board 400X are provided.

  The information display unit 751 is provided near the entrance 1611 on the front surface of the upper starting winning device 1431. The character string “IN” is displayed on the surface of the information display section 751. Therefore, the player can recognize that the area in which the game ball has entered is the entrance 1611 of the upper starting winning device 1431 by looking at the character string of “IN”. In other words, the character string of “IN” displayed on the information display unit 751 allows the player to recognize that the area to which the information display unit 751 is attached (that is, the entrance 1611) is the entrance of the upper starting winning device 1431. (Hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “starting winning device entrance information”).

  The information display portion 752 is provided on the front surface of the base 401 so as to overlap with a position near the branch position between the left and right downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 and the second passages 1614A and 1614B. A character string of “lucky” is displayed on the surface of the information display section 752.

  Therefore, the player sees the character string “lucky”, and the area where the game ball has entered (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) starts the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It can be recognized that this is a winning area. That is, the character string of “lucky” displayed on the information display unit 752 indicates that the area to which the information display unit 752 is attached (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) starts the special symbol when the game ball enters. It functions as information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “start-up winning area information”) that allows the player to recognize that the area is where a winning occurs.

  The information display portion 753 is formed of a passage wall constituting a passage extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A and 1614B in the passage forming member 1631 so as to slightly overlap the entrances of the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B. It is provided on the back side of a passage wall (for example, passage wall portion 1631A in FIG. 32 (c)) on the rear side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front. The character string “OUT” is displayed on the surface of the information display section 753.

  Therefore, the player can recognize that the area in which the game ball has entered (that is, the second passages 1614A and 1614B) has entered the area in which the special symbol does not become the starting winning prize by seeing the character string of “OUT”. . That is, the character string of “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753 indicates that the area to which the information display unit 753 is attached (that is, the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B) has a special design even if the game ball enters. (Hereinafter, this information is also referred to as "non-start winning area information").

  The information display unit 754 is provided on the front surface of the lower starting winning device 1432 so as to overlap the opening 1432A for guiding the game ball that has entered the lower starting winning device 1432 to the back side (rear side) of the base 401. A character string “GO” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 754.

  Since the game ball that has entered the opening 1432A is detected by the lower start winning switch 1442, the player sees the character string “GO”, and the area in which the game ball has entered the start winning prize of the second special symbol. Can be recognized. That is, the character string “GO” displayed on the information display unit 754 functions as start winning prize area information similar to “lucky” displayed on the information display unit 752.

  Of the information display portions 751 to 754, on the surface of the information display portions 751, 752, and 754, information that gives the player an expectation for a special symbol starting prize, such as starting prize device entrance information and starting prize winning area information, is provided. Is displayed. The information display portions 751, 752, 754 are provided at positions where the player can directly view them via the front plate 222 and the rear plate 223, such as the upper and lower starting winning devices 1431, 1432 and the front surface of the base 401.

  Therefore, since the information display portions 751, 752, and 754 are arranged at positions that are relatively easy to be visually recognized, when a game ball enters a region corresponding to each of the information display portions 751, 752, and 754, a special game held by the player is held. It is possible to suitably amplify the expectation for the winning of the symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), five nails 411A lined down to the right are arranged from the upper side to the right side of the left information display portion 753. As shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c), the left information display portion 753 is provided in any one of a vertical range and a horizontal range in which these five nails 411A are arranged. Is also provided to fit.

  When the nail 411A is erected in such an arrangement with respect to the left information display portion 753, when the player whose viewpoint is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 obliquely looks at the lower left direction while playing a game, As shown in FIG. 32 (d), the player sees the left information display portion 753 overlapping the rear of the five nails 411A.

  Thereby, the visibility of the left information display portion 753 when the player who is playing the game looks obliquely in the lower left direction is impeded by the five nails 411A overlapping the front side. On the surface of the information display section 753, information such as a character string of “OUT” (that is, non-start winning area information) that reduces a player's expectation for starting winning of a special symbol is displayed. Since the visibility of the information display portion 753 is impaired by the nail 411A, the impression of the character string of “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 hardly remains for the player.

  Even when the game ball that has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 enters the area corresponding to the information display unit 753 (that is, the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B), a special symbol starting winning is not obtained. This can prevent the information display unit 753 from strongly impressing the player. Thereby, it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player for the fact that the game ball has not entered the special winning start prize even though the game ball has entered the upper starting prize winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

  As for the right information display unit 753, similarly to the left information display unit 753, from the upper side to the left side of the information display unit 753, five nails 411B arranged in the lower left direction are arranged (see FIG. 32A )), The information display portion 753 is provided so as to fit within any of the vertical range and the horizontal direction range in which the five nails 411B are arranged.

  Therefore, when a player whose viewpoint is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 obliquely looks at the lower right direction because the player is playing the game, the information display section 753 on the right side is provided with five nails 411B behind the nail. Since it appears to overlap on the side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 is impeded by the five nails 411A overlapping on the front side. As a result, similarly to the case of the above-described information display portion 753 on the left side, it is possible to suppress the discourage of the player for the fact that the winning of the special symbol has not been won.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32A, in each of the left and right information display portions 753, the character string of “OUT” displayed on the surface thereof has a nail 411A or a nail 411B corresponding to each information display portion 753. Are arranged along the arrangement direction. That is, the character string of “OUT” displayed on the left information display portion 753 is arranged in the lower right like the arrangement of the nails 411A, and the character string of “OUT” displayed on the right information display portion 753 is , And the nails 411B are arranged at the lower left like the arrangement of the nails 411B.

  Thus, by arranging the character strings displayed on the information display portion 753 along the arrangement direction of the nails 411A or 411B, for example, as shown in FIG. Since it is possible to overlap the nail 411A on the rear side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 can be suitably reduced.

  Further, since the information display portion 753 is provided on the back side (rear side) of the base 401 as shown in FIG. 32C, the visibility of the information display portion 753 viewed through the base 401 is The visibility is lower than the visibility of the information display portions 751, 752, and 754 that can be visually recognized without the intervention of the base 401.

  In particular, in front of the information display portion 753, not only the base 401 but also the front and rear of the passage wall portion, such as the passage wall portion 1631A, which constitutes a passage extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A, 1614B, in front of the gaming machine. , The visibility of the information display portion 753 is further reduced.

  Therefore, since the base 401 and the passage wall 1631A overlap with the front side of the information display portion 753, the impression of the character string of “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 hardly remains in the impression. This makes it possible to appropriately suppress discouragement of the player when the first special symbol does not result in a start winning, even though the game ball has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the upstream passage 1613A1 is configured as a passage for guiding the game ball to the left and then to the back, so that the passage wall forming the left end of the upstream passage 1613A1. The portion 1631B is configured as a wall surface that is substantially perpendicular to the base 401 and extends in the up-down direction. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the passage wall portion 1631B is disposed so as to overlap the front side of the left information display portion 753 in the field of view of the player obliquely looking at the lower left direction. The performance is hindered by the passage wall portion 1631B overlapping the front side. Accordingly, also in this respect, since the impression of the character string of “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753 is less likely to remain in the player, it is more preferable to discourage the player from being unable to win the special symbol starting prize. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a continuous school of fish facing leftward can be displayed in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. Since the fish school can be displayed by using only the light guide plate 715B of the resin cover 715, the effect of displaying the school of fish can be more impressive.

  In particular, since the base 701 is also configured to display a picture 742 constituting a part of a continuous school of fish facing leftward, the opening 401D of the base 401 and the light guide plate are provided like the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Even when there is a structural separation between the light guide plate 715B and the light guide plate 715B, discontinuity that occurs between the pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B and the pattern 741 displayed on the base 401 is reduced by the pattern 742. I can make up for it. Thereby, the effect by the school of fish displayed beyond the display area by the light guide plate 715B can be realized as a suitable effect in which unnaturalness due to discontinuity is suppressed.

  In addition, since one fish with the pattern 741 and the pattern 742 is displayed at the boundary between the periphery of the opening 401D in the base 401 and the base 701 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, a series of fish schools facing leftward is formed. It is possible to prevent the nature from becoming unnatural at the boundary. Similarly, since one fish with the pattern 743 and the pattern 742 is displayed at the boundary between the light guide plate 715B and the base 701 in the front view of the gaming machine, the continuity of the fish school that faces leftward is the same. Unnaturalness at the boundary can also be suppressed.

  In addition, a pattern (not shown) connecting the pattern 741 partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D and the pattern 742 paired with the pattern 741 is also displayed on the side wall portion 702. The discontinuity in the height direction (front-back direction) due to the difference between the height and the base 701 can be compensated for by the pattern displayed on the side wall 702. Therefore, unnaturalness due to discontinuity in the effect by the fish school which is continuous in the left direction can be more suitably suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game looks obliquely in the lower left or lower right direction is different from the nails 411A and 411B that overlap the front side of the information display unit 753. Or the passage wall 1631A or the passage wall 1631B, so that the player does not win the special symbol even though the game ball enters the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611. Disappointment can be suitably suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the information display unit 753 is provided at a position where the nails 411A and 411B do not overlap when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, when the information display unit 753 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the word “OUT” is displayed. It can be made to be fully visible. Therefore, the information display unit 753 indicates that, for the player viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the area to which the information display unit 753 is attached is an area in which a special symbol starting prize does not occur even if a game ball enters. Can be suitably reported.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment, half mirrors 761A and 761B capable of reflecting light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the like are provided on the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 33A is a front view of the reel device 710 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a simplified cross-sectional view of the reel device 710 along the line DD in FIG. . FIG. 33C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 100 cut in a vertical direction at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and FIG. 33D shows the pressing operation device 261 and the wave motion. It is a top view of the lamp 771.

  In FIG. 33B, illustration of the light guide plate 715B and the panel light emitting device 490B is omitted. FIG. 33C also shows the island 10 on which the pachinko machine 100 is installed. In FIG. 33 (c), the head of the player X during the game is shown for reference, and the optical path of light emitted by the upper center frame light emitting device 271 and the pressing operation device 261 is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Is shown in FIG. 33 (b) and 33 (c), cross-section hatching is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), on one surface side of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 (in this embodiment, the front side of the outer cover 715A), among the effective lines arranged in the vertical direction, A half mirror 761A and a half mirror 761B are provided above and below the middle line display area, respectively, while leaving the middle line display area. Although the resin cover 715 of this embodiment has a configuration including the light guide plate 715B (not shown in FIG. 33B), it may be a simple transparent cover without the light guide plate 715B.

  The half mirrors 761A and 761B are semi-transmissive mirrors that transmit light from the back side (rear side) of the resin cover 715 forward while reflecting light from the front side (front side) of the resin cover 715. Can be. In addition, as the half mirrors 761A and 761B, a transparent plate on which aluminum is deposited can be used as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is configured as a hollow cylindrical body having a transparent decorative pattern drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R has a common internal configuration, and the internal structure of the middle reel 711M will be representatively described below with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33B, inside the middle reel 711M, three light emitting devices 718A to 718C for irradiating light from inside to a region visible from the resin cover 715 on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. Is provided.

  Among the light-emitting devices 718A to 718C, the light-emitting device 718A disposed at the uppermost position is a light-emitting device that irradiates light to an upper line region of the symbol effective lines on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. A light emitting unit E6 such as an LED or the like directed slightly upward is provided. By turning on (light emitting) the light emitting means E6, it is possible to cause a symbol located on the upper line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M to emit light.

  On the other hand, the lowermost light emitting device 718C is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the area of the lower line in the effective line, and includes a light emitting unit E8 such as an LED slightly forward-facing downward. I have. By turning on the light emitting means E8, it is possible to cause a symbol located on the lower line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M to emit light.

  The light emitting device 718B disposed between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the middle line area of the effective line, and emits light such as an LED or the like directed substantially horizontally forward. Means E7 are provided. By turning on the light emitting means E7, the symbols located on the middle line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M can be displayed by light emission.

  Lighting (light emission) and light extinguishing of these light emitting devices 718A to 718C are independently controlled by the sub control board 940. Therefore, the symbol located on the upper line, the symbol located on the middle line, and the symbol located on the lower line can be independently lit and displayed.

  A partition wall 719A is provided between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B. The partition wall 719A prevents light emitted from the light emitting device 718A (light emitting means E6) from entering the middle line area, and light from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) enters the upper line area. It has a function to prevent that.

  In addition, a partition wall 719B is provided between the light emitting device 718B and the light emitting device 718C. The partition wall 719B prevents light emitted from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) from entering the lower line area, and light from the light emitting device 718C (light emitting means E8) enters the middle line area. It has a function to prevent that.

  When the light emitting device 718A is turned on (emits light), the half mirror 761A provided above the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting unit E6 forward, so that the symbol located on the upper line is not displayed. It becomes visible from the front. On the other hand, when the light emitting device 718A or the like is turned off, the half mirror 761A at that position does not emit light from the back side (rear side), so that the front side (front side) becomes a mirror, and thereby the front side (rear side) Side).

  Similarly, when the light emitting device 718C is turned on, the half mirror 761B provided below the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting means E8 forward, and thereby the symbol located on the lower line. Becomes visible from the front. On the other hand, when the light emitting device 718C or the like is turned off, the half mirror 761B at that position does not emit light from the back side (rear side), so that the front side (front side) turns into a mirror, thereby, the front side (rear side). Side).

  As shown in FIG. 33C, the resin cover 715 that covers the front side of each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R protrudes forward from the base 701 in an arc shape in a side sectional view. Since the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided along the surface of the resin cover 715 (outer cover 715A) on the upper part and the lower part of the resin cover 715, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper side is a light emitting device. When 718A or the like is turned off, it functions as a mirror having a convex surface that faces upward and forward in a side sectional view. When the light emitting device 718C and the like are turned off, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower side functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing the front lower side in a side sectional view.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper part of the resin cover 715 is separated from the upper central frame light emitting device 271 provided on the upper central edge 211A of the front decoration 210 (see FIG. 5). The emitted light is reflected, and the reflected light is provided at a position where the player playing the game can visually recognize the reflected light. Thereby, when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the emitted image G1 of the upper center frame light emitting device 271 reflected on the half mirror 761A as shown in FIG. .

  The pressing operation device 261 of this embodiment is configured to be turned on (emit light) or turned off under the control of the sub-control board 940. That is, in the pressing operation device 261, the operation unit pressed and operated by the player is configured as a light-emitting unit having a light-transmitting property, and a light-emitting unit such as an LED provided on the back side of the light-emitting unit is provided with Lighting or extinguishing is performed by controlling with 940.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower portion of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player playing the game. It is provided in a suitable position. Thereby, when the pressing operation device 261 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the light-emitting image G2 of the pressing operation device 261 reflected on the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), wave lamps 771 are provided on the left and right of the pressing operation device 261. The wave lamp 771 includes three lamps 771A to 771C arranged outward from the side of the pressing operation device 261. Each of the lamps 771A to 771C constituting the wave lamp 771 is provided with a light emitting means such as an LED on the back side thereof, and is controlled by the sub-control board 940 to overlap the front side of the light emitting means. The light-emitting portion having a light-transmitting property is configured to be turned on or off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761AB provided on the lower portion of the resin cover 715 reflects light emitted from the wave lamp 771 (lamps 771A to 771C), and reflects the reflected light during the game. It is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize it. Thereby, when the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the emitted image G3 of the wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG.

  Since the half mirrors 761A and 761B are not arranged in the display area of the middle line in the resin cover 715, the light emitting device 718B and the like are always turned on, so that the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are located in the middle line. The symbol can be always visually recognized by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 33C, the hold lamp 720 is provided on the rear end side (the side closer to the base 701) of the lower half mirror 761B. Since the lower half mirror 761B is configured to have a convex surface facing the front lower side in a side cross-sectional view, the light of the holding lamp 720 is easily reflected downward by the half mirror 761B, and is hardly seen by the player.

  Therefore, the visibility of the image G2 (image of the pressing operation device 261) and the image G3 (image of the wave lamp 771) reflected on the half mirror 761B can be suppressed from being hindered by the image of the hold lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B. .

  Further, while the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 are located on the lower front side of the resin cover 715, the holding lamp 720 is located on the rear end side of the lower half mirror 761B and the pressing operation device 261 It is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the wave lamp 771.

  Therefore, while the image G2 of the pressing operation device 261 and the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 can be visually recognized in the front area (the area on the top side of the resin cover 715) of the half mirror 761B, the holding lamp 720 that can be visually recognized by the player. Is limited to the rear end side of the half mirror 761B. Therefore, even when the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B is visually recognized by the player, the image of the holding lamp 720 hardly hinders the visibility of the images G2 and G3.

  Although not shown in FIG. 33C, the lottery result display device 730 is also located on the rear end side (the side closer to the base 701) of the lower half mirror 761B, similarly to the holding lamp 720. Since it is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, the visibility of the images G2 and G3 is hardly hindered by the image of the lottery result display device 730 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, substantially along the circumferential direction of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. A circular partition 717 is provided. The partition portion 717 is fixedly provided so as not to rotate independently of each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. A reel side lamp 717A is provided in a region of the front side of the partition portion 717 which is on the back side of the half mirror 761B. Is provided.

  The reel side lamp 717A is provided with a light emitting means such as an LED at the back side thereof, and the light emitting means is controlled by the sub-control board 940, so that the light transmitting means overlaps the front side of the light emitting means. The light emitting unit as the lamp 717A is configured to be turned on or off.

  In the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is, for example, a color (same color, specific color) corresponding to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 at a timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. ). Since the reel side lamp 717A is provided on the back side of the half mirror 761B, when the reel side lamp 717A is turned on, the player can visually recognize the light of the reel side lamp 717A transmitted through the half mirror 761B.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper half mirror 761A serving as a mirror having a convex surface facing forward and upward in a side sectional view reflects light emitted from the upper central frame light emitting device 271 and reflects the reflected light. The game player is provided at a position where the player can view the game. Therefore, when the upper central frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player visually recognizes the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A, and does not shift the line of sight to the upper central frame light emitting device 271. 271 can be recognized, and the color of the upper center frame light emitting device 271 emitted can be recognized.

  A frame light emitting device provided on the upper center edge portion 211A such as the upper center frame light emitting device 271 may emit light as part of a suggestive effect performed during a period in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Since the player generally tends to pay attention to the variable display during the display of the decorative symbol, even when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is emitted as part of the suggested effect, The player can recognize the light emitting state of the upper center frame light emitting device 271 from the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A while watching the display of the change of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, the lower half mirror 761B, which is a mirror having a convex surface facing forward and lower in the side sectional view, reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, and reflects the reflected light during the game during the game. It is provided in a position that can be visually recognized by a person. Therefore, when the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player shifts his / her eyes to the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 by visually recognizing the image G2 or the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B. In addition, it is possible to recognize that the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 emit light, and in what color the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 emit light.

  The pressing operation device 261 may emit light in synchronization with an operable period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated or a notification period in which the operable period is reported before the operable period. The operable period includes a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to display a special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to perform volume adjustment, This includes a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to change the music played during the game.

  Generally, the player tends to pay attention to the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, even if the pressing operation device 261 is illuminated during the variable display of the decorative pattern, The user can recognize the light emission state of the pressing operation device 261 from the image G2 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the change display of the decorative symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation time (operable time) of the pressing operation device 261 without noticing the light emission of the pressing operation device 261.

  Similarly to the pressing operation device 261, the wave lamp 771 may emit light in synchronization with an operable period of the pressing operation device 261 or a notification period for the operable period. However, even when the wave lamp 771 is illuminated during the change display of the decorative pattern, the player recognizes the light emission state of the wave lamp 771 from the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the change display of the decorative pattern. It is possible to do. Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing the emission of the wave lamp 771 and missing the operation time of the pressing operation device 261.

  Also, regardless of the operation time of the pressing operation device 261, even when the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 711 are emitted as part of the suggestion effect, the player can see the half-mirror while watching the change display of the decorative symbol. The suggested effect can be recognized by visually recognizing the image G2 and the image G3 reflected in the image 761B.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A sets the color corresponding to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 at a timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. Is configured to emit light. Therefore, the operation timing is notified not only by the reflected light from the half mirror 761B (that is, the images G2 and G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B) but also from the reel side lamps 717A provided between the reels that are easily noticed by the player. Since it is performed by the direct light, it is possible to more appropriately suppress the player from overlooking the notification of the operation timing.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is variably configured. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 34A is a front view of the reel device 710 in a case where the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is a basic display area, and FIG. , 711M, and 711R are front views of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row is a reduced display area. FIG. 34C is a top view of the reel device 710 schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display area of the symbol row, and FIG. 34D is a schematic view showing a state where the display area of the symbol row is reduced. It is a top view of the reel device 710 shown typically. In FIGS. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the gears 781 to 783 are illustrated as circles in which the shape of the teeth is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, basically, the respective reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged such that the central axes of the respective reels are on the same line. Thus, the symbol rows of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R are arranged in a line in the left-right direction without overlapping each other in a basic state. Therefore, in the basic state, the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is configured to have the width of the length W1 (the length in the left-right direction).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261), each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R moves, and as a result, FIG. As shown in (1), the width of the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is a length W2 shorter than the length W1. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be reduced by operating the predetermined operation unit by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (c), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, substantially along the circumferential direction of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. A circular partition 717 is provided. The two partition portions 717 support the rotation shaft of the middle reel 711M so that the middle reel 711M can rotate.

  An extension 786 is provided on the rear side of one of the two partition portions 717 (in the present embodiment, the right partition portion 717) and extends substantially horizontally to the rear side across the rotation axis of the middle reel 711M. . On the right side surfaces of the right partition portion 717 and the extension portion 786 (that is, the surface on the side away from the middle reel 711M), a rack gear (not shown) in which the gear portions of the gear 781 are cut is provided in a substantially horizontal direction. Are formed linearly.

  The gear 781 is connected to a driving mechanism (not shown) driven and controlled by the sub-control board 940, and operates by driving control of the driving mechanism by the sub-control board 940. The gear 781 is provided so as to mesh with the rack gear formed on the partition part 717 and the extension part 786, whereby the rack formed by the rack gear and the gear 781 formed on the partition part 717 and the extension part 786 is provided. The middle reel 711M can be moved in the front-rear direction by the and pinion mechanism.

  The left reel 711L is provided with an extension 787 extending substantially horizontally to the left from the rotation axis of the left reel 711L. On the rear side surface of the extending portion 787, a rack gear (not shown) formed by cutting the teeth of the gear 782 is formed linearly in a substantially horizontal direction.

  The gear 782 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) driven and controlled by the sub-control board 940, and operates by the drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub-control board 940. The gear 782 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed on the extending portion 787, whereby the left reel 711 </ b> L is driven by a rack-and-pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed on the extending portion 787 and the gear 782. Can be moved in the left-right direction.

  The right reel 711R is provided with an extension 788 extending substantially horizontally to the right from the rotation axis of the right reel 711R. On the rear side surface of the extension 788, a rack gear (not shown) formed by cutting the teeth of the gear 783 is formed linearly in a substantially horizontal direction.

  The gear 783 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that is driven and controlled by the sub control board 940, and operates by driving control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940. The gear 784 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed on the extending portion 788. Thus, the right reel 711R is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed on the extending portion 788 and the gear 783. Can be moved in the left-right direction.

  When the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) in a state where the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is as shown in FIG. Then, the center reel 711M moves rearward (in the direction of the arrow M1) so as to be behind the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R.

  Next, the gear 782 and the gear 783 operate, whereby the left reel 711L moves rightward (direction of arrow M2), and the right reel 711R moves leftward (direction of arrow M3). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the movement amounts of the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are substantially the same.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 34B, the left reel 711L moving rightward and the right reel 711R moving leftward display the middle reel 711M located behind these reels 711L, 711R. The area is reduced to the extent that the numeric information of the main symbol can be recognized. Therefore, the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is reduced in the width direction (lateral direction).
When the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) in a state where the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is as shown in FIG. After the reels 711L and 711R have been operated to open in the left-right direction, the middle reel 711M moves forward and returns to the state shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be reduced by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) by the player. Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling that it is difficult to see the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Further, when the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, a left symbol row (left reel 711L) and a right symbol row (right reel 711R), which are the symbol rows that can constitute the reach display, are provided. , Is located on the front side of the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M), so that the reach display can be displayed with a symbol having the same size as that before the reduction of the display area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the reach display from being lost due to the reduced display area of each symbol row.

  When the display area of each symbol row by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is reduced, the middle reel 711M moves rearward (backward), and the left and right reels 711L and 711R are almost the same in the direction in which they approach each other. Is configured to move by a distance of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the center of the display area of each symbol row from moving due to reduction. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's line of sight from moving left or right due to the reduction in the display of the variation of the decorative symbol due to the reduction of the display area of each symbol row.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to each of the above embodiments, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

(1) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to First Embodiment In the first embodiment, information such as a lottery result of each special effect lottery is stored for a variable display of a decorative symbol being executed. However, a plurality of (for example, four) decorative symbol variations including a variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and a decorative symbol executed before the variable display of the active decorative symbol are executed. For each of the displays, information such as a lottery result of each special effect lottery may be stored each time the variable display of each decorative symbol is executed. In this configuration, even if the result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, the lottery of each special effect lottery is performed. Information such as a result is stored.

  In this manner, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decoration symbol being executed is a big hit, in the special game state to which the transition has been made after that, the player stops the decoration symbol that has been fixed and stopped at the big hit symbol. By restoring not only the suggested effect that can appear in the variable display but also the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display of the decorative symbol performed before the variable display of the decorative symbol, until the transition to the special game state You can know the history of suggestive effects.

  In the first embodiment, the suggested effect can be restored in the special game state. However, the time at which the suggested effect can be restored is not limited to the special game state. During the display, the suggestion effect that could appear in the change display of the decorative symbol executed prior to the change display may be restored, so-called “customer waiting effect” (that is, the pachinko machine 100 A configuration may be used in which a period during which a game is not played by a player has elapsed for a predetermined period of time, which is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, such as a title display or a demonstration display, which is unrelated to the game state, is performed. .

  In this configuration, even if the result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, the lottery of each special effect lottery is performed. Information such as a result may be stored.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the suggested effect that can appear during the variable display of the decorative symbol is configured to be able to be restored. However, this is performed using the image indicating the holding status displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Alternatively, a configuration in which a suggestion effect indicating the probability of occurrence of a special game state for each hold (that is, each held unit game right) may be restored. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be restored including the suggestive effect that can appear before the variable symbol of the decorative symbol is started. The variable display can be restored over a long period after the occurrence of. In this case, when the color indicating the degree of expectation is displayed as the color of the hold display as information to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM regarding the variable display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the transition to the running special game state. The information corresponding to the color for each hold display in the above, the number of holds at the timing when the start winning prize corresponding to the jackpot winning, and the information about the variable display executed each time the hold is exhausted are also It is preferable that the control board 940 memorize the details so that the process up to the occurrence of the big hit can be reproduced more accurately.

  In the first embodiment, the suggestion effect selected from a plurality of types is produced by operating the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period. A plurality of operable operation modes may be set, and a plurality of types of suggested effects may be associated with each operation mode.

  In this case, when the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 is operated in any one of the plurality of operation modes during the operable period, a plurality of suggestion effects associated with the operated operation modes are provided. It is good also as composition which a suggestion effect chosen from inside appears. For example, when a rightward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during a predetermined operable period, a selected one of a plurality of types of patterns constituting a suggested effect associated with the operation is selected. When a pattern appears and a leftward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during the same operable period, a selection is made from a plurality of types of patterns constituting a suggested effect associated with the operation. The second pattern may appear.

  As described above, when it is possible to perform operations in a plurality of different operation modes in the same operable period, one of the plurality of operation modes (for example, the selection operation device 263) is operated in the operable period. By performing the operation in the right direction, it is inevitably impossible to see the suggested effect seen by the operation in another operation mode (for example, the left operation on the selection operation device 263). On the other hand, by making it possible to restore the suggested effect that can appear later in the operable period, the player can later see the suggested effect in which the appearance is exclusive. Can be given, whereby the interest in the game can be suitably improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, a video effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is illustrated as the suggestion effect, but the suggestion effect is not limited to the video effect. For example, effects by sound (voice, music) output from the audio devices 281, 282, effects by light output from the various light emitting devices 490, 271-275, and effects by operation of operably provided structures, etc. May be an element of the suggestive effect.

  Different suggested effects may be configured according to a combination of elements such as a video effect, a sound effect, a light effect, and a structure operation. In this case, a suggested effect in which the included elements are different depending on the operation mode in the operable period may be made to appear. For example, when a rightward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263, a suggestion effect composed of a video effect, a sound effect, a light effect, and a structure operation is made to appear, and the selection operation is performed. When a leftward operation is performed on the device 263, a suggestion effect composed of a video effect and a sound effect is made to appear, and when an upward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263, a video effect is performed. It may be possible to cause a suggestion effect composed of only the information to appear.

(2) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Second Embodiment In the second embodiment, after the end of a special effect (first special effect, second special effect) that is a suggested effect, the next operable period. The cancelable period (the first cancelable period and the second cancelable period) is provided before the start of the (second operable period and the third operable period), but after the end of the suggested effect. Therefore, a configuration in which a cancelable period is provided before the next suggested effect is started may be provided.

  Alternatively, the operation device for instructing execution of the suggestion effect and the operation device for instructing cancellation of execution of the suggestion effect may be different operation devices, and the operable period may also serve as the cancelable period. In a configuration in which the operable period also serves as the cancelable period, processing corresponding to the operating device operated first during the period (that is, execution of the suggested effect or cancellation of the execution of the suggested effect) is performed. Alternatively, a process corresponding to the last operated device during the period may be performed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the player can cancel the execution of the suggestion effect for the second and subsequent times by the suggestion effect cancel function among the plurality of suggestion effects that can appear during the one-time fluctuation display. Although the configuration has been described, a configuration in which a cancelable period is provided before or immediately after the start of the variable display and the execution of the suggestive effects that can appear during the variable display may be cancelled.

  In the second embodiment, the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display having the operable period (that is, the suggestive effect that appears when the player operates) is canceled by the suggestive effect cancel function. Although a configuration is possible, a configuration may be adopted in which a suggestion effect that automatically appears during the variable display of the decorative symbol regardless of the player's operation can be canceled by the player using the suggestion effect cancel function.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent operable period is not generated, so that the subsequent suggested effect is not displayed. Although a subsequent operable period is generated, the configuration may be such that the subsequent suggested effect is not displayed by invalidating the operation of the player in the operable period.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent suggestion effect is not displayed. However, during the cancelable period, the player operates the pressing operation device 261. Is operated, a suggestion effect having a lower probability of occurrence of the special game state than the suggestion effect appearing before the cancelable period may appear.

(3) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Third and Fourth Embodiments In the third and fourth embodiments, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period, the operable period is set. Is displayed in another area of the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100 or the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100 which is the own machine. Is displayed in another area of the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100 or the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100 which is its own machine. It may be. Note that, in a configuration in which all of the decorative symbol change display after the pressing operation device 261 is operated is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of another pachinko machine, the other pachinko machine 100 is not operated during the subsequent operable period. A configuration that can be operated using an operation device (such as the pressing operation device 261) may be employed.

(4) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Fifth Embodiment In the fifth embodiment, as the reserved full tank effect selection table, each of the number of reservations for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to the maximum number. The first table referred to when the first time in the suspension count monitoring period is reached, the second table referred to when the second time is reached, the third table referred to when the third time is reached, and 4 The fourth table to be referred to in the case of the second and subsequent times is prepared, but each of these tables (the first table, the second table, and the third table) is held in a special symbol lottery while being held. The hit table is referred to when the hold that has been won is included, and the out-of-office table that is referred to when the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is not included in the hold. Alternatively, the configuration may be as follows.

  By having the hit time table and the out-of-office table, when the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, compared to when the hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery is not included As a result, it becomes easier for the reserved full effect to appear, so that it is possible to create a situation where the appearance of the reserved full effect causes the player to expect the occurrence of a special game state. Therefore, the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be more appropriately improved.

(5) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Sixth Embodiment In the sixth embodiment, the complete loss variation display (variation display not including the reach display) is performed a plurality of times, so that the variation display including the reach display is performed. Although the variation display of the corresponding variable display time is performed, the complete loss variation display of the variable display time corresponding to the variable display including the reach display may be dedicatedly prepared.

  Also, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is held while being held. When there is a hold that has been won in the lottery, the variable display that includes multiple variable displays that do not include the reach display for the same variable display time as the selected variable display is executed. A configuration may be employed in which a variable display that does not include the reach display for a variable display time shorter than the display is executed.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol, when the special symbol lottery is held among the special symbols held, Has a configuration in which the variable display including the variable display that does not include the reach display for a plurality of times with the same variable display time as the selected variable display is executed at a predetermined probability to facilitate the storage of the hold. The configuration that facilitates this is not limited to this.

  For example, when the entrance portion of the starting device according to the special symbol is provided with an entry regulating mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside of the starting device, the posture of the entry regulating mechanism is set inside the starting device. The game ball may be changed to a position in which the game ball can easily enter (or allow the game ball to enter the interior), thereby making it easier to store the hold. Alternatively, by shortening the period from when the reach display is performed to when the middle symbol finally stops, the period during which the player can stop firing the game ball is shortened, thereby making it easier to store the hold. It may be.

  In the sixth embodiment, when there is a hold for the special symbol lottery among the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), there is no hold for the selected symbol. Alternatively, the variable display time may be selected based on a condition in which the variable display for a long time is easily selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(6) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Seventh Embodiment In the seventh embodiment, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is configured as a drum formed in a cylindrical shape. , 711R may be a circling belt on which a decorative pattern is drawn on the outer peripheral surface and which is rotated by driving a roller.

  In the seventh embodiment, the second sub-symbol predictor notice and the countdown notice are performed by using the variable display performed on the reel device 710 (that is, the display of the decorative symbol caused by the fluctuation of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R). However, a pre-reading effect such as a second sub-symbol advance notice or a countdown advance notice may be performed using a variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  In the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the stop display timing has come on the lottery result display device 730 during the reach presentation period in the variation display of the running decorative symbol, the variation display time of the lamp variation display is determined. , The timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is excluded from the reach effect period. The configuration in which the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is excluded from the reach effect period is not limited to the above method. For example, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is earlier than the reach effect period. As described above, a configuration in which the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be reduced.

  Alternatively, the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 can be changed from the reach effect period by shortening the change display time in the change display of the decorative symbol being executed without changing the change display time of the lamp change display. It may be configured to be removed. In such a modification, the variable display time in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is shortened, so that the suggestion effect executed during the reach effect period is shown to the player, and the lottery result of the hold full tank effect lottery is quickly displayed. I can show you.

  In addition, when the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes during the execution of the look-ahead effect using a plurality of variable displays, the timing of the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 is the timing of the stop-display. The variable display time of the lamp variable display may be extended such that the variable display time comes after the end of the variable display of the prefetch target in the above.

  In addition, when the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined or during the execution of the look-ahead effect, it is determined that a predetermined special effect display is being executed, or that the special effect display is to be executed. In such a case, the sub-control board 940 may be provided with control for selecting not to execute the pending full effect.

  In addition, at the time when the effect performed by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 and the effect performed by displaying the image on the resin cover configured as the light guide plate in the reel device 710 are performed, the lottery result display device is displayed. The configuration may be such that the execution period of the effect is adjusted or the variable display time of the lamp variable display is adjusted so that the stop display is not performed at 730.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, the middle reel 711M, which has been stopped from the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display of the prefetch target, is changed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R in the fluctuation display of the prefetch target. Although the fluctuation is started in synchronization with the formation of the reach display on the middle line L2, the fluctuation of the stopped middle reel 711M is stopped at the end time of the fluctuation display of the prefetch target (that is, the stop display is performed). The timing may be started a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds before) before the timing.

  In addition, the fluctuation of the stopped middle reel 711M is not limited to being started in synchronization with the occurrence of the reach display, but is effected by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275, or as a light guide plate in the reel device 710. The configuration may be such that it is started in synchronization with an effect performed by displaying an image on the formed resin cover.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol predictor notice, the second sub-symbol 713B (that is, the symbol that does not constitute the big hit symbol) is displayed on the middle line L2 in the fluctuation display before the pre-read target fluctuation display. When the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed in a state where the left and right reels 711L, 711L, 711L, 711L, 712M are kept in the middle line L2 from the beginning to the end of the variable display in the subsequent variable display, 711R is varied.

  Alternatively or additionally, in the variation display prior to the variation display of the prefetch target, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in a symbol that does not constitute the reach display, In the variable display, the middle reel 711M may be changed while the symbol of the middle line L2 on the left and right reels 711L and 711R is maintained from the beginning to the end of the variable display.

  In such a configuration, in the variable display two or more times ahead of the prefetch target, the changing middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed with the second sub symbol 713B or the first sub symbol 713A displayed on the line L2. In the variable display, the middle reel 711M is changed again. Thereafter, in the variable display immediately before the prefetch target, the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed with the main symbol 712 displayed on the line L2, and the left and right reels 711L and 711R are changed with the middle reel 711M stopped. Then, one of the reels (for example, the left reel 711L) is stopped first. At this time, the main symbol 712 of the reel displayed on the middle line L2 may constitute a reach display together with the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M displayed on the middle line L2. After stopping one of the left and right reels 711L and 711R, the other reel is stopped.

  In the seventh embodiment, the decorative symbols of the left reels 711L, 711M, 711R are configured such that the main symbols 712 and the sub symbols 713 (713A, 713B) are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction in the second sub-symbol warning. However, with respect to the left reel 711L stopped next to the middle reel 711M, three or more sub-patterns 713 are continuously arranged between the main symbol 712 and the main symbol 712, or "3" is added. A plurality of sub-designs 713 may be continuously arranged between the main design 712 and the main design 712 with “5”.

  According to such a configuration, in a state where the second sub-design 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the continuous sub-design 713 on the left reel 711R is arranged on the middle line L2, whereby the upper line L1 In any of the middle line L2 and the lower line L3, it is possible to prevent the reach display from being formed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

  In the seventh embodiment, the second sub-symbol predictor notice is provided using the second sub-symbol 713B provided on the middle reel 711M. However, the second sub-symbol 713B is provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R. Alternatively, the second sub-symbol 713B provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R may be used to perform a prefetch effect similar to the second sub-symbol advance notice.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of the variable display performed before the variable display of the prefetch target is performed is determined by the main symbol 712 displayed when the middle reel 711M finally stops. (The number included in the main symbol 712), but the countdown may be performed by a temporary stop during the change.

  In the seventh embodiment, the main symbols 712 provided on each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are all symbols including numbers. However, the main symbols 712 for the left reels 711L and 711R that do not count down in the countdown notice. May be composed of symbols including numerical information other than numbers. In addition, as for the middle reel 711M performing the countdown in the countdown notice, the main symbol 712 includes a symbol including a number (for example, “3”, “2”, “1”) that may be used for the countdown in the countdown notice. , And may include a symbol including numerical information other than numbers, and preferably includes a symbol including at least “1” and “2”.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of the variable display performed until the variable display of the prefetch target is performed is configured by the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M, but the countdown is performed. The reel is not limited to the center reel 711M, but may be a left reel 711L or a right reel 711R.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the number of times of the variable display during the prefetch effect that is being executed until the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is displayed by the countdown. The announcement effect may be configured by counting up each time the variable display is executed, and the main symbol 712 may be a number (for example, “1”, “2”) that may be used for counting up in the count up announcement. , "3").

(7) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Eighth Embodiment In the eighth embodiment, the fish school which faces leftward and is continuous is displayed on both sides of the reel device 710. Only the right side or the left side may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, the region J is a part of the light-transmitting substrate 401. However, the light-transmitting region J is formed on a non-light-transmitting substrate. It may be.

  In the eighth embodiment, a part of the passage forming member 1631 (passage wall portions 1631A and 1631B) overlaps the front side of the left information display portion 753 when the player playing the game looks obliquely in the lower left direction. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated member that obstructs the visibility of the information display unit 753 overlaps the front side of the information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game looks obliquely in the lower left direction.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 after being entered from the entrance 1611 is detected by the start winning switches 1441A and 1411B, a special symbol start prize ( That is, the lottery condition for the special symbol lottery is satisfied. Instead, when the detection unit detects a game ball that has entered the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2, a certain number of game balls are provided as prize balls (privileges) without satisfying the lottery condition. You may.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, when a game ball entered from the entrance 1611 enters the second passages 1614A and 1614B, a special symbol starting prize is not established. However, when a game ball enters the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2. A configuration in which a lower value privilege (for example, the number of prize balls, the winning probability of a special symbol lottery, or the gaming state after winning the special symbol lottery) may be provided.

(8) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Ninth Embodiment In the ninth embodiment, the resin cover 715 on which the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided has a configuration in which the resin cover 715 has an arc shape in a side sectional view. The half mirrors 761A and 761B may be shaped to face the front upper side and the front lower side, respectively. For example, the shape of the resin cover 715 may be a shape having at least a front-facing slope and a front-facing lower slope, such as a trapezoidal shape in a sectional view, and a convex surface facing the front upper side and a front facing lower side. The shape may be configured by a convex surface and a plane continuously provided between the convex surfaces.

  In the ninth embodiment, the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the upper and lower sides of the resin cover 715. However, the half mirror 761A or the half mirror 761B is provided on one of the upper and lower sides of the resin cover 715. A configuration may be provided.

  In the ninth embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is provided in the area behind the lower half mirror 761B. However, in addition to or instead of this, the rear side of the upper half mirror 761A is provided. It is also possible to provide a reel side lamp similar to the reel side lamp 717A in a region where Further, a reel side lamp similar to the reel side lamp 717A may be provided on the entire front side of the partition portion 717.

  In the ninth embodiment, the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710. However, the cover provided on the surface of the liquid crystal display device such as the decorative design display device 479 has a pressing operation device. In order to allow the player to visually recognize the image G2 and the like 261, an arc-shaped projection or the like may be provided in a side sectional view, and the half mirrors 761A and 761B may be provided on the projection.

  In the ninth embodiment, the pressing operation device 261 is configured to be lit (emit light). However, the pressing operation device 261 may not be configured to emit light. Even if the pressing operation device 261 does not emit light, the player can recognize the operable period of the pressing operation device 261 by visually recognizing the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

(9) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Tenth Embodiment In the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row is changed in the reel device 710 that performs the variable display of the decorative symbol by each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. Although the case of reduction is illustrated, the present invention may be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative design display device 479. For example, among the symbol rows of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the middle symbol row is reduced, and the left and right symbol rows are moved so as to be arranged on both sides of the reduced middle symbol row. It may be.

  In the tenth embodiment, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved in a direction approaching the middle reel 711M after the middle reel 711M is moved rearward. After moving the reels 711L and 711R backward, the reels 711L and 711R may move in a direction approaching the middle reel 711M.

  Alternatively, while keeping the position of the left reel 711L as it is, the middle reel 711M is moved backward so as to be behind the left reel 711L, then moved in a direction approaching the left reel 711L, and then the right reel 711R is moved from the middle reel 711M. A configuration in which the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving in the direction approaching the middle reel 711M after moving backward to become the rear side.

  In the tenth embodiment, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R move toward the middle reel 711M after moving the middle reel 711M backward, the LED provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side. May be set to be higher than the brightness of the light emitting means such as LEDs provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R located on the front side of the middle reel 711M. Note that the luminance of the light emitting means provided inside each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is controlled by the sub control board 940.

  According to such a modification, the luminance of the light emitting means provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side is made higher than the luminance of the light emitting means provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R, whereby the middle reel 711M is provided. Are located behind the left and right reels 711L and 711R, it is possible to suppress the pattern of the middle reel 711M from being difficult to see.

  (10) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine of a different type from the above embodiments. For example, the pachinko machine may be configured to increase the expected value of a large hit until a large hit state occurs once (for example, two or three times) once the hit has occurred. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special game state on condition that a ball wins in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, the present invention may be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Furthermore, other than a pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball type pachinko and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine, and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a game machine such as a parrot in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing problems and effects as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like. Further, the meanings and examples of the terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of the terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying symbols in a plurality of columns,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (decorative symbol variation pattern) of the multiple-row symbol variation display when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in the plurality of rows in a variation mode selected by the variation mode selection unit, and then stops at a combination of symbols according to the lottery result. A change execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying;
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols in the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the first result by the change execution means, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is displayed. A generated game control means (main control board 920);
Of the lottery results obtained by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variation display of the plurality of columns of symbols is suspended by the variation executing means are stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) which can be stored in
Special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit. And
The variation mode selection unit is configured to store the lottery result indicating the first result in the storage unit by the hold storage unit when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is included. Selecting a variation mode in which the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means is more likely to increase than when the lottery results indicating the first result are not included in the lottery results. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the winning information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding the lottery result on hold up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variation display of the symbols in a plurality of columns is selected by the variation mode selection means, and the symbols in the plurality of columns are displayed on the display unit in the selected variation mode by the variation execution means. After the variable display, the display is stopped with a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols in a plurality of columns are stopped and displayed in a combination of the symbols showing the first result. I do.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns by the variation executing means are suspended are stored in a predetermined storage unit up to a predetermined number by the suspension storage means. You. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit in such a manner, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability on the display unit. Therefore, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  The variation mode selecting means, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means, includes the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. Compared to the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included, a variation mode is selected in which the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is more likely to increase.

  Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit tends to increase. Therefore, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying a special effect is increased. This makes it difficult for the player to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  When the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result, Since the special effect is more easily displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, the feeling of the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 10 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 10 may be a "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 10, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be "information used for lottery by the lottery means" instead of the description of "lottery result". Alternatively, the information may be “information corresponding to a lottery result”.

<Feature 11>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying symbols in a plurality of columns,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (decorative symbol variation pattern) of the multiple-row symbol variation display when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in the plurality of rows in a variation mode selected by the variation mode selection unit, and then stops at a combination of symbols according to the lottery result. A change execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying;
When the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbols in the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols indicating the first result by the change execution means, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is displayed. A generated game control means (main control board 920);
A holding storage unit capable of storing, in a predetermined storage unit, up to a predetermined number of lottery results, among the lottery results by the lottery unit, in which the execution of the fluctuation display of the plurality of columns of symbols by the fluctuation execution unit is suspended. Sub-control board 940);
Special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit. And
The variation mode selectable by the variation mode selection means is such that, after a symbol is stopped and displayed in a state in which a part of the symbol combination indicating the first result is formed, the remaining symbols for which the variable display is continued are selected by lottery. A reach display mode to stop and display in a symbol according to a lottery result by means, and a non-reach display mode not including the reach display mode, at least,
The variation mode selection unit is configured to store the lottery result indicating the first result in the storage unit by the hold storage unit when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit is included. A gaming machine wherein the non-reach display mode is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the winning information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variation display of the symbols in a plurality of columns is selected by the variation mode selection means, and the symbols in the plurality of columns are displayed on the display unit in the selected variation mode by the variation execution means. After the variable display, the display is stopped with a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols in a plurality of columns are stopped and displayed in a combination of the symbols showing the first result. I do.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results in which the execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns by the variation executing means are suspended are stored in a predetermined storage unit up to a predetermined number by the suspension storage means. You. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit in such a manner, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability on the display unit. Therefore, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  The variation mode selecting means, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means, includes the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. The non-reach display mode is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included. Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the variable display in the non-reach display mode is easily displayed.

  When the fluctuation display of the reach display mode is displayed, the player may stop firing the game ball during the fluctuation display in consideration of the occurrence of the special game state thereafter. On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the characteristic 11, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the fluctuation display of the non-reach display mode is performed. Since it is easy to be displayed, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping firing of the game ball during the fluctuation display.

  This makes it easy for the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit to be increased by the holding storage means, so that the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying special effects is increased. Increase. This makes it difficult for the player to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  When the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result, In comparison, since the variation display in the non-reach display mode is more easily displayed, the special effect can be more easily displayed when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit. it can. Therefore, a situation can be created in which the player can expect the occurrence of the special game state by displaying the special effect, and the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 11 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 11 may be a "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 11, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be "information used for the lottery by the lottery means" instead of the description of "lottery result". Alternatively, the information may be “information corresponding to a lottery result”.

<Feature 12>
The gaming machine according to feature 11,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable time determining unit that determines a variable time according to the variable display of the symbols in a plurality of columns,
The variation mode selection means is for selecting the variation mode corresponding to the variation time determined by the variation time determination means,
The variation mode selection unit may include, when the variation time determined by the variation time determination unit corresponds to the reach display mode, the first result in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. Is included, the non-reach display mode having a variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination means is displayed in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means. Is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in
The fluctuation executing means, the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means corresponds to the reach display mode, and the first result among the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means If the non-reach display mode having a fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means is selected by the fluctuation mode selection means when the lottery result shown is included, the selected non-reach is selected. A gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is changed one or more times so that the change time of the change time determined by the change time determining means is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 12, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means corresponds to the reach display mode, the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. When the lottery result shown is included, the non-reach display mode of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means is changed by the fluctuation mode selection means, The selection is made with a higher probability than in the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included.

  When the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means corresponds to the reach display mode, and the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the fluctuation mode is changed. When a non-reach display mode having a fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means is selected by the selection means, the selected non-reach display mode is performed one or more times by the fluctuation execution means. Then, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determination means is performed.

  Therefore, in order to perform the variable display of the non-reach display mode of the variable time corresponding to the reach display mode, it is possible to divert the data relating to the non-reach display mode of the variable time shorter than the reach display mode, and to correspond to the reach display mode. It is not necessary to exclusively prepare data relating to the non-reach display mode of the variable time. Thereby, the consumption of storage capacity in the gaming machine can be suitably suppressed.

<Feature 20>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in a variable manner, and then displays a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol in a variation executing unit (sub-control board 940). ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means. (Main control board 920),
An operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player;
It is composed of at least a part of a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied to when a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means. For each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at one or more operation times set during the effect execution possible period (the execution period of the variable display of the decorative symbol), each operation mode is executed. Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting each of the special effects to be executed from the plurality of types of effects,
In the one or more operation timings set within the effect executable period, the first operation mode of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the one or more operation timings A first special effect display unit (sub-control board 940) for displaying, on the display unit, a special effect selected by the special effect selection unit for the first operation mode when the operation unit is operated;
Each of the special effects selected by the special effect selection means for each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit which can be operated at the one or more operation timings set within the effect executable period. Storage control means (sub-control board 940) for storing the effect information shown in a predetermined storage section (RAM of the sub-control board 940) so that the special effects can be restored;
When the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within a predetermined restorable period set after the end of the effect execution possible period, the storage control unit causes the storage unit to A second special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying, on the display unit, a special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the second operation mode based on the stored effect information; A gaming machine comprising:

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, when a player operates a production button at a predetermined timing, the display content on the display device is changed, and a game machine in which a predetermined production such as outputting a corresponding sound from a speaker is also performed. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined effect based on a player operating the effect button at a predetermined timing. For example, if the player operates the production button at a predetermined timing, the player can experience the production corresponding to the operation of the production button, but if the player does not operate the production button at that timing, The player cannot experience an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 20, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured such that a predetermined effect is suitably executed based on a player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs a symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in accordance with the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols showing the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  An effect that can be executed at least partially during a period from when the start condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied to when a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means is displayed. The operation time is set within the period. For each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the operation time, each special effect executed when each operation mode is performed is performed by the special effect selection means, and a plurality of types of effects are respectively provided. Is selected from The effect information indicating each special effect selected by the special effect selecting means is stored in a predetermined storage unit by the storage control means so that the special effects can be restored.

  When the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes that can be operated at the one or more operation timings set in the one or more operation timings set within the effect executable period The special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the first operation mode is displayed on the display unit by the first special effect displaying means.

  On the other hand, when the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode of the plurality of operation modes within a predetermined restorable period set after the end of the effect execution period, the storage control unit stores The special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the second operation mode is displayed on the display unit based on the effect information stored in the unit.

  Therefore, even when the operation unit is not operated in the second operation mode at a predetermined operation time within the effect executable period, the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode within the restoration available period. The special effect (special effect corresponding to the second operation mode) that the player could not view because the player did not operate the operation unit in the second operation mode at the predetermined operation time during the effect executable period. Direction) can be restored and viewed. This reduces the possibility that the player will have a negative emotion in the game, such as regretting that he or she did not see some or all of the special effects on his or her own will during the production executable period. The decrease in interest is suppressed.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 20 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit, or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the “first special effect display means” and the “second special effect display means” in the feature 20 are “first special effect execution means” and “second special effect execution means” for executing various special effects including display, respectively. Effect executing means ".

<Feature 21>
The gaming machine according to feature 20, wherein
The effect executable period includes an execution period of a symbol variable display executed by the variable execution unit,
A plurality of the operation times are set within the execution period of the symbol change display,
The second special effect display means may include, during the restorable period, a second operation effect of the plurality of operation modes at the operation time after the operation time at which the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. When the operation unit is operated in the operation mode of the above, based on the effect information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit, the special operation selected by the special effect selection unit for the second operation mode A gaming machine displaying an effect on the display unit.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 21, in the configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at different operation times within the execution period of the symbol change display, the symbol change display is performed. The special effect corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed by operating the operation unit in the first operation mode at the previous operation time during the execution period, but is displayed in the second operation mode at the subsequent operation time. Even when the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode is not displayed without operating the operation unit, the player can operate the operation unit in the second operation mode within the restorable period to allow the player to perform the operation. , The special effect corresponding to the second operation mode can be restored and viewed.

  If a plurality of operation times are provided within the execution period of the symbol change display, if the special effect that can be displayed for each operation time is an effect that suggests the probability of occurrence of a subsequent special game state, If the displayed special effect is an effect that indicates that the likelihood of transition to the special game state is lower than the previously displayed special effect, the player loses the expectation of transitioning to the special game state. May be discouraged from playing games. In order to prevent such discouragement, the player can choose not to operate the operation unit at a later operation time, but if the operation unit is not operated at a later operation time, then the player transitions to a special game state Sometimes, you may want to know what was going on if you were displaying a special effect that you did not display on your own.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 21, the player can restore and view the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode during the restorable period, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction. It is possible to suitably improve the interest in the game.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21,
The second special effect display means performs the operation in the second operation mode at the operation time when the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes during the restorable period. When the unit is operated, the special effect selected by the special effect selecting unit for the second operation mode is displayed on the display unit based on the effect information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. A gaming machine characterized by displaying.

  According to the gaming machine described in the characteristic 22, in the configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at the common operation time within the effect executable period, the first operation is performed during the effect executable period. Even if the operation unit cannot be operated in the second operation mode by operating the operation unit in the operation mode of, the player responds to the second operation mode during the restorable period. The special effects can be restored and viewed. As a result, the special game that the player has not been able to see during the effect executable period can be seen, so that the player can be satisfied and the interest in the game can be appropriately improved.

<Feature 30>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in a variable manner, and then displays a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol in a variation executing unit (sub-control board 940). ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means. (Main control board 920),
A first operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player,
A second operation unit (selection operation device 263) provided at a position different from the first operation unit and operable by a player;
It is composed of at least a part of a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied to when a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means. The special effect executed when the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect executable period (the execution period of the variable display of the decorative symbol) is selected from a plurality of types of effects. Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940),
When the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit for the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time Is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit, and when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time, the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time is selected by the special effect selection unit. A special effect control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the displayed special effect to be displayed at a position different from the predetermined position.

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, when a player operates a production button at a predetermined timing, the display content on the display device is changed, and a game machine in which a predetermined production such as outputting a corresponding sound from a speaker is also performed. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined effect based on a player operating the effect button at a predetermined timing. For example, the effect displayed on the display device by the operation of the operation button by the player is always displayed in the same area, and in that respect, it was monotonous without novelty.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 30, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to suitably execute a predetermined effect based on a player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs a symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in accordance with the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols showing the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  An effect that can be executed at least partially during a period from when the start condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied to when a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means is displayed. The operation time is set within the period. Each special effect executed when the operation unit is operated at the operation time is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the special effect selecting means.

  When the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect execution possible period, the special effect control means selects the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time by the special effect selection means. The special effect is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit. On the other hand, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time, the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit for the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time is performed by the special effect control unit. It is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position.

  Therefore, the display position of the special effect can be changed depending on whether the first operation unit is operated or the second operation unit is operated, so that the game in which the special effect is displayed according to the operation of the player has a variety of games. It is possible to improve the interest.

<Feature 31>
The gaming machine according to feature 30, wherein
When the second operation unit is operated at an operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means selects the special effect selection for an operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. A gaming machine characterized by transmitting effect information indicating a special effect selected by means to another gaming machine, and displaying the special effect on a display unit of the other gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 31, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control unit causes the first operation unit to operate at the operation time. By transmitting the effect information indicating the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means to the operation, the special effect is displayed on the display unit of the other gaming machine.

  Therefore, the special effect can be displayed on the display unit of another gaming machine, so that the special effect can be viewed together with other players, and an interest different from the case of playing the game alone can be obtained.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30, wherein
When the second operation unit is operated at an operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control unit performs the special effect with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. The special effect selected by the selection unit is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position on the display unit, and the first operation unit or the second operation unit is displayed at the predetermined position at the operation time. A game machine displaying contents displayed on the display unit when no operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 32, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control unit causes the first operation unit to operate at the operation time. The special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the operation is different from a predetermined position on the display unit (that is, a position where the special effect is displayed when the first operation unit is operated at the operation time). Will be displayed. On the other hand, at a predetermined position on the display unit, the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated at the operation time is displayed.

  Therefore, the player simultaneously displays the special effect displayed by operating the second operation unit and the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated. Since it is possible to see, the interest in the game can be appropriately improved.

<Feature 33>
The gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31,
A receiving means (sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B) capable of receiving the effect information from another gaming machine;
The gaming machine, wherein the special effect control means displays the special effect indicated by the effect information on the display unit when the effect information transmitted from another gaming machine is received by the receiving means.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 33, when the effect information transmitted from another gaming machine is received, the special effect display means displays the special effect indicated by the effect information based on the received effect information. Displayed in the section. Therefore, a special effect based on the effect information received from another gaming machine can be displayed on the display unit, so that the special effect can be viewed together with other players playing with the other gaming machine, and the game can be played alone. You can get a different kind of interest than when you do it.

<Feature 40>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in a variable manner, and then displays a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol in a variation executing unit (sub-control board 940). ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means. (Main control board 920),
A holding storage unit capable of storing, in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920), a lottery result of which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation execution unit is suspended among the lottery results, up to a predetermined number. (Main control board 920),
Special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit. And
The special effect display means is stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means includes a lottery result indicating the first result. A gaming machine that displays the special effect with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the winning information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 40, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs a symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in accordance with the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols showing the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variation display of the symbols by the variation executing means is suspended are stored in a predetermined storage unit with the upper limit of the predetermined number by the suspension storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit in such a manner, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability on the display unit. Therefore, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  The special effect display means, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means, includes the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. The special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included.

  Therefore, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result, Since the special effect is more easily displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, since the feeling of the progress of the game can be sharpened, it is possible to improve the interest in the gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of the lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

  Note that the “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 40 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit, or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 40 may be "special effect execution means" for executing various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 40, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be "information used for lottery by the lottery means" instead of the description of "lottery result". Alternatively, the information may be “information corresponding to a lottery result”.

<Feature 50>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in a variable manner, and then displays a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol in a variation executing unit (sub-control board 940). ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means. (Main control board 920),
A holding storage unit capable of storing, in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920), a lottery result of which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation execution unit is suspended among the lottery results, up to a predetermined number. (Main control board 920),
Special effect display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches an upper limit. And
The special effect display means, after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means reaches an upper limit at a predetermined first time, a predetermined second time within a predetermined time period including the first time. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit again at the time, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed at the first time. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the winning information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably hold and hold the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs a symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in accordance with the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols showing the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  Of the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation executing means is suspended are stored in a predetermined storage unit up to a predetermined number by the suspension storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit in such a manner, the special effect display unit displays a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability on the display unit. Therefore, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  After the number of the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches the upper limit in the predetermined first time, the special effect display means holds the special effect in the predetermined second time within the predetermined time period including the first time. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage means reaches the upper limit again, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed in the first period.

  Therefore, during the predetermined period, when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit again, a special effect is displayed before the number of lottery results reaches the upper limit. Since it becomes easier, the player can engage in a game aiming at establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of storing a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  Note that the “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 50 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit, or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in the feature 50 may be a "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 50, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be "information used for the lottery by the lottery means" instead of the description of "lottery result". Alternatively, the information may be “information corresponding to a lottery result”.

<Feature 51>
In the gaming machine according to feature 50,
After the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit reaches the upper limit at a predetermined first time, the special effect display unit stores the number of lottery results in the storage unit by the hold storage unit at the second time. When the number of the stored lottery results reaches the upper limit again, if the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit, the holding is performed. A gaming machine wherein the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the storage means.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 51, after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit in the first predetermined period, the special effect display unit stores the holding result in the second period. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the means reaches the upper limit again, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means, The special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  Therefore, when the lottery result stored in the storage unit includes the lottery result indicating the first result, and when the lottery result stored in the storage unit does not include the lottery result indicating the first result, Since the special effect is more easily displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effect. Therefore, the feeling of the progress of the game can be sharpened, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature 60>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the display unit displays the symbols in a variable manner, and then displays a symbol corresponding to the lottery result as a stop symbol in a variation executing unit (sub-control board 940). ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a game control means for generating a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state after a stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means. (Main control board 920),
A predetermined value set within a period from the satisfaction of the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means to the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result by the variation executing means. As a first special effect that can be displayed at the first time, a first special effect selecting means (sub-control board) for selecting one special effect from a plurality of types of special effects indicating the probability of occurrence of the special game state thereafter 940)
A first special effect unit (sub-control board 940) for displaying the first special effect selected by the first special effect selection unit on the display unit at the first time;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player;
After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time, before the predetermined second time set after the first time within the period arrives, the operation unit Is operated, when the occurrence probability of the special game state suggested by the first special effect is higher than a predetermined probability, the second special effect indicating the occurrence probability of the special game state is performed by the second special effect. A second special effect control unit that controls the second special effect not to be displayed on the display unit at the time or to display the second special effect indicating the probability of occurrence of the special game state higher than the first special effect on the display unit (Sub-control board 940).

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, various character designs and the like are displayed during the variable display of the symbols, and each time the character symbols and the like are displayed, the degree of expectation to be a big hit according to the type of the displayed character symbols and the like is determined. What is suggested to a person is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2009-153699).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to display an effect indicating a degree of expectation to a big hit to a player during a symbol change display. For example, during the variable display of the symbol, when the display of the character pattern or the like displayed later has a lower degree of expectation to the big hit suggested by the display than the display of the character symbol or the like displayed earlier, the player The sense of expectation of the jackpot is temporarily increased by the earlier display, but is lost by the later display, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 60, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured to appropriately execute a predetermined effect based on a player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs a symbol variation display on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols showing the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  At a predetermined first time set within a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means to when stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result is performed by the variation executing means, is performed. The first special effect that can be displayed is selected by the first special effect selecting means from a plurality of types of special effects that indicate the probability of occurrence of the special game state thereafter. The selected first special effect is displayed on the display unit at the first time by the first special effect means.

  After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time, the first result is executed by the variable execution means after the start condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied. If the operation unit is operated before a predetermined second time set after the first time within the period until the stop display of the stop symbol shown is performed, it is suggested by the first special effect. If the occurrence probability of the special game state is higher than the predetermined probability, the second special effect indicating the occurrence probability of the special game state is not displayed on the display unit at the second time under the control of the second special effect control means. Alternatively, a second special effect indicating the probability of occurrence of a special game state higher than the first special effect is displayed on the display unit.

  Therefore, after the first special effect, it is possible to suppress the display of the second special effect indicating the probability of occurrence of the special game state lower than the first special effect, so that the second special effect is performed after the first special effect. In the configuration to be performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing expectations for the occurrence of the special game state and from decreasing interest in the game.

  Note that the “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 60 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit, or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them. Therefore, the "first special effect display means" in the feature 60 may be a "first special effect execution means" for executing various special effects including display, and the "second special effect control means" Control may be performed to execute various special effects including display.

<Feature 70>
A spinning body (middle reel 711M) in which a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols (main symbols 712) to which two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display are attached is arranged as a predetermined symbol row. Each of a plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of turning bodies (the left reel 711L, the middle reel 711M, and the right reel 711R) including the turning body is changed by turning the plurality of turning bodies, respectively. A display unit (reel device 710) capable of displaying,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for variably displaying the plurality of symbol rows on the display section when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying the symbols in a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means; When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the variation executing means at a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a game more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is a state,
If the starting condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. A storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information by storing the information in the RAM 920 until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable execution means;
A predetermined effect based on information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and effect target information corresponding to execution of a predetermined variable display executed after at least two or more variable displays are executed. Effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is that, in a variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, a symbol of a symbol column displayed on the predetermined torso of the plurality of symbol columns is the predetermined symbol. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect is such that the player stops visually so as to be visually recognizable in a symbol attached with numerical information corresponding to the number of times of the variable display executed until the variable display is executed.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the symbol display starts changing display of the effect symbol and performs a jackpot lottery based on the result of the jackpot lottery. A configuration is known in which, when it is determined to generate a big hit, a large hit symbol (for example, “777”) is stopped and the effect symbol is displayed and then a big hit is generated.

  Further, there is a conventional pachinko machine in which a result of a jackpot lottery is pre-read and a pre-reading effect is performed during a change of the effect symbol (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-291480). The look-ahead effect means that if a game ball wins in the starting winning opening while the design pattern is changing, the number of reserved balls is added, and a big hit lottery is performed based on the random value obtained at the winning timing, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives a preview of a game state that is generated when the variation display of the effect symbol performed by digestion of the reserved ball ends. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first reserved ball is a jackpot, it is foreseen that a jackpot will occur when the next variable display following the current variable display ends.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to a gaming machine of a conventional configuration that performs a look-ahead effect. For example, in order to increase a player's interest in a look-ahead effect, diversification of the look-ahead effect is required.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the winning information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine of a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. This problem is also common to the gaming machines described in the following features 80 to B0.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with diversified prefetching effects. Further, with the gaming machine described in the feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably utilize a configuration capable of holding lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. In other words, the display unit is a predetermined symbol row in which a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols with two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display are arranged so as to orbit, Each of a plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of torso bodies including the torso body can be variably displayed by rotating each of the plurality of torso bodies.

  When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display unit by the variability execution unit, and thereafter, are stopped and displayed with the stop symbols corresponding to the lottery results by the lottery unit. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  If the starting condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means.

  Based on the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and the effect target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least two or more variable displays are executed, As a predetermined effect, in a variation display performed before the predetermined variation display by the variation performing means, a symbol of a symbol row displayed on a predetermined torso of a plurality of symbol rows is subjected to a predetermined variation display. An effect is performed in which the player stops visually so as to be visually recognizable by a symbol to which the numerical information corresponding to the number of times of the variable display is executed.

  Therefore, the player visually recognizes the numerical information added to the symbol of the symbol row displayed on the predetermined torso in the variable display during execution, and thereafter performs the display until the predetermined variable display is performed. The number of times of the variable display to be performed can be grasped from the numerical information. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the lottery result for the predetermined variable display that gradually approaches, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the countdown of the number of times of the variable display performed until the predetermined variable display is performed is performed by the symbol of the symbol column displayed on the torso body that performs the variable display, the player may not miss the countdown. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the symbol sequence to be displayed in a variable manner is not limited to the rotating body, but there are some gaming machines that are executed by displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device or the like. There are many players who are liable to increase component costs and prefer a variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body. At this time, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, if the number of countdowns described above is displayed separately from a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, the cost of the display device is added.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 70, a configuration is adopted in which a symbol is attached to the three-dimensional torso with numeral information, and a part of the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means by the symbol. Can be configured. For this reason, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, the display size of the symbol displayed on the rotating body is set to be large so that the player can easily recognize the symbol and suppress an increase in cost. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an effect in which a countdown display is performed by a symbol until a predetermined change display is performed.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 70, "... the player can visually stop at the symbol with the numerical information" is not limited to completely stopping the symbol with the numerical information. Alternatively, the symbol may stop within a predetermined range and accompany an operation such as swinging, or may be a temporary stop in the middle of the change instead of the final stop of the symbol.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine according to feature 70,
In the predetermined effect, in the variation display performed before the predetermined variation display by the variation performing means, the symbol of the symbol row displayed on the predetermined body is a different time from the predetermined body. In a state in which the torso is moving, the effect is such that the player stops visually so as to be visually recognizable by a symbol attached with numerical information corresponding to the number of times of the changing display executed until the predetermined changing display is executed. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  With the gaming machine according to the feature 71, the player can change the display to the predetermined turning body while the other turning body (a turning body different from the predetermined turning body) is fluctuating in the change display during execution. By visually recognizing the numeric information attached to the symbols in the displayed symbol row, it is possible to grasp the number of times of the variable display to be performed until the predetermined variable display is executed thereafter from the numeric information. Therefore, the player can easily distinguish the predetermined torso from the other torso among the plurality of torso, and can prevent the player from overlooking the countdown performed in the predetermined torso.

<Feature 80>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A first variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that, after the start condition is satisfied, variably displays the symbol on the display unit and then stops and displays the symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the first variation execution means is stopped and displayed in a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a game state;
In a case where the start condition is satisfied while the symbol variation display is being performed by the first variation execution unit, information corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery unit is stored in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit. (Main control board 920) by storing the information in the (main control board 920) until the first change execution means executes the change display of the symbol corresponding to the information. When,
Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches an upper limit;
When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding unit reaches an upper limit and the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit, the display unit or the display unit A second variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) that performs a predetermined second variation display on a second display unit (lottery result display device 730) different from the above, and then stops and displays in a predetermined stop mode.
A special effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing the special effect when the second change display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined stop mode by the second change execution means. A gaming machine.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the winning information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the symbols are variably displayed on the display unit by the first variance execution unit, and then stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the game is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  When the start condition is satisfied while the variable display is being performed by the first variable execution unit, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding unit, and thereby, The information can be put on hold until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

  When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding unit reaches the upper limit, the execution of the predetermined special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit with a predetermined probability. When the execution of the special effect is selected, the second variation execution unit performs a predetermined second variation display on the display unit or a second display unit different from the display unit, and then stops in a predetermined stop mode. Is displayed, and then a special effect is executed by the special effect executing means.

  Therefore, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, and the player increases the number of pieces of information corresponding to the held lottery results. It is possible to face a game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of the above. As a result, the player's willingness to play the gaming machine capable of holding the lottery result up to the predetermined upper limit value can be improved.

  Further, whether or not the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means is notified to the player as a stop display after the second variable display, so that the number of information corresponding to the held lottery result reaches the upper limit. Thus, during the period until the second variable display ends (that is, during the execution period of the second variable display), the player's expectation of the execution of the special effect can be appropriately amplified.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 80 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by operation of an operable structure, or The effect may be a combination of some or all of these effects.

  In addition, the second variation executing means in the gaming machine according to the characteristic 80, when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the display unit or a second different from the display unit After performing the second predetermined fluctuation display on the display unit, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, the stop is displayed in a predetermined stop mode, and when the execution of the special effect is not selected. May be displayed in a stop mode different from the predetermined stop mode.

<Feature 81>
The gaming machine according to feature 80,
The second variation execution means performs the second variation display that varies within a predetermined range on the display unit or the second display unit, and then the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit. And a stop display is provided at different positions within the predetermined range depending on whether the special effect has been selected or not.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 81, when the second variation display is performed by the second variation execution unit, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit, and when the execution of the special effect is selected, Since the position of the stop display after the second variable display is different from the case where there is no display, the player can easily judge sensuously from the position of the stop display whether or not execution of the special effect has been selected. In particular, since the stop display is limited to a predetermined range, the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

<Feature 90>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol columns,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A variation execution unit (sub-control board 940) for variably displaying the plurality of symbol rows on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying the symbols in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation executing unit, the lottery is executed in a gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state. A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a certain special game state;
If the start condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variable execution means executes the variable display corresponding to the information,
Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches an upper limit;
A special effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing the special effect when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means;
When the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means and the variable display is executed by the variable execution means, a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display. And a selection result display means (sub-control board 940) for recognizing and displaying that the player has selected the execution of the special effect at a time different from the time when the special effect is performed. Machine.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. Further, such a pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and on the display device, a variable display of the symbol is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the final stop display of the variable display is displayed on the lottery result. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  Also, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while the symbol is being displayed on the display device, the winning information (corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big hit lottery There is a configuration in which information is stored on hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (corresponding to a lottery result) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the starting port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is simply wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably holding and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol columns are variably displayed on the display unit by the variability execution unit, and then the halting display is performed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  If the starting condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means.

  When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding unit reaches the upper limit, the execution of the predetermined special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit with a predetermined probability. When the execution of the special effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means. Therefore, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, and the player increases the number of pieces of information corresponding to the held lottery results. It is possible to face a game aiming at the establishment of the starting condition with the purpose of the above. As a result, the player's willingness to play the gaming machine capable of holding the lottery result up to the predetermined upper limit value can be improved.

  Further, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and when the variable display is executed by the variable execution means, the execution of the special effect is selected, and the selection result display means As a result, the variable display is displayed so as to be recognizable by the player at a time different from the time when the predetermined attention display is displayed.

  Therefore, the display indicating that the special effect has been selected does not coincide with the display time of the attention display, so that the player does not easily miss the display indicating that the special effect has been selected. In addition, when a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variation display, the player can concentrate on the attention display, so that the expectation of the variation display during execution by the attention display is appropriately improved. be able to.

  The “predetermined attention display” in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 is a stop display in a state in which some of the symbol rows of the plurality of symbol rows constitute a part of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first result. May be displayed (so-called “reach display”), a display of a character (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit, or a suggestion effect based on light emission of the light-emitting unit (for ease of transition to the special game state). Effect that indicates the degree or degree of expectation).

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by operation of an operable structure, or The effect may be a combination of some or all of these effects.

<Feature 91>
A gaming machine according to feature 90,
The selection result display means, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, when the predetermined attention display is displayed in the fluctuation display performed by the fluctuation execution means A game machine which hastens the end time of the attention display, and displays, after the end of the attention display, the player can recognize that the execution of the special effect has been selected.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 91, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, and when a predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variable executing means, By the selection result display means, the end time of the attention display is advanced, and it is displayed so that the player can recognize that the execution of the special effect has been selected after the end of the attention display. This allows the player to quickly view a display indicating that execution of the special effect has been selected, while displaying the attention display to the player.

<Feature 92>
The gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91,
After the predetermined attention display is stopped and displayed in a state where some of the symbol rows of the plurality of symbol rows constitute a part of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first result, the remaining symbol rows are displayed. It is a display until it is stopped and displayed with a symbol according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The selection result display means, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, when the predetermined attention display is displayed in the fluctuation display performed by the fluctuation execution means A game machine displaying, after completion of the predetermined attention display, that the player has been able to recognize that the execution of the special effect has been selected.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 92, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, and when a predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variable executing means, By the selection result display means, the fact that the execution of the special effect has been selected is displayed so that the player can recognize it after the end of the attention display. Here, the attention display is stopped and displayed in a state where some of the symbol rows of the plurality of symbol rows constitute a part of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first result, and then the remaining symbol rows are selected by lottery means. This is a display up to the stop display with a symbol according to the lottery result, and it is a display that expects the player to transition to the special game state, so by focusing the player on the display of interest, execution by the attention display It is possible to preferably improve the sense of expectation for the medium fluctuation display.

<Feature A0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol columns,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for variably displaying the plurality of symbol rows on the display section when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying the symbols in a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means; And when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol columns are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, the result is more advantageous than the normal game state. A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a game state,
If the start condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variable execution means executes the variable display corresponding to the information,
A predetermined effect based on information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and effect target information corresponding to execution of a predetermined variable display executed after at least one or more variable displays are executed. Effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is
When the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, the plurality of symbol columns are different from the first result in a predetermined display area (middle line L2) where the transition to the special game state is made. Executing a first variable display in which a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is a stop symbol which is a combination of predetermined symbols which does not transition to the special game state,
After executing the first variation display, one or more variation displays executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation performing means, or included in the predetermined symbol combination in the predetermined variation display Some symbols (second sub-designs 713B) that cannot stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the first result in the predetermined display area when the partial symbol is included and the partial symbol is included. While maintaining the state of being displayed in the predetermined display area, other symbol rows (left symbol row, right symbol row) different from the symbol row (middle symbol row) including the partial symbol among the plurality of symbol rows ) Starts a second fluctuation display in which
Synchronously with a predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined fluctuation display, or at a timing that is a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display, a symbol which has been stopped from before the last time in the plurality of symbol columns. A gaming machine characterized by an effect of starting a change in a row (middle symbol row).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the symbol display starts changing display of the effect symbol and performs a jackpot lottery based on the result of the jackpot lottery. A configuration is known in which, when it is determined to generate a big hit, a large hit symbol (for example, “777”) is stopped and the effect symbol is displayed and then a big hit is generated.

  Further, there is a conventional pachinko machine in which a result of a jackpot lottery is pre-read and a pre-reading effect is performed during a change of the effect symbol (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-291480). The look-ahead effect means that if a game ball wins in the starting winning opening while the design pattern is changing, the number of reserved balls is added, and a big hit lottery is performed based on the random value obtained at the winning timing, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives a preview of a game state that is generated when the variation display of the effect symbol performed by digestion of the reserved ball ends. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first reserved ball is a jackpot, it is foreseen that a jackpot will occur when the next variable display following the current variable display ends.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to a gaming machine of a conventional configuration that performs a look-ahead effect. For example, in order to increase a player's interest in a look-ahead effect, diversification of the look-ahead effect is required.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature A0, a gaming machine with diversified prefetching effects can be provided. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol columns are variably displayed on the display unit by the variability execution unit, and then the halting display is performed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  If the starting condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means.

  A predetermined effect is produced based on the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and the effect target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one or more variable displays are executed. It is executed by the execution means.

  Specifically, in the predetermined effect, first, when a stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, a plurality of symbol columns are displayed in a predetermined display area where a transition is made to the special game state. A first variable display in which stop display is performed with a stop symbol corresponding to a lottery result different from the first result and a predetermined symbol combination that does not transition to the special game state is executed.

  After the first variable display is executed, one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display by the variable executing means, or the stop displayed in the first variable display in the predetermined variable display. A part of symbols included in a predetermined symbol combination that is a symbol, and when a part of the symbols is included, a symbol in which a stop symbol corresponding to the first result cannot be stopped and displayed in a predetermined display area. While the state where is displayed in the predetermined display area is maintained, a second variable display in which another symbol row different from the symbol row including the partial symbol among the plurality of symbol rows is started.

  Then, in synchronism with a predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined fluctuation display, or at a timing that is a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display, the symbol which has been stopped from before the last time in the plurality of symbol rows. The variation of the columns (that is, the symbol columns including some symbols displayed in the predetermined display area among the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variation display) is started.

  Therefore, at least one variable display executed before the predetermined variable display, or in the predetermined variable display, as the second variable display, a part of the stop symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display. While maintaining the state in which the symbols are displayed in the predetermined display area, the symbol columns that are different from the symbol columns including the partial symbols are changed, so that the player starts the second variable display. This amplifies the sense of expectation of the display (stop display) of the lottery result with respect to the predetermined change display that comes afterward, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In particular, the symbol sequence that has been stopped from the fluctuation display before the predetermined fluctuation display is synchronized with the predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined fluctuation display, or for a predetermined time from the end time of the predetermined fluctuation display. Since the change is started at the previous timing, it is strongly impressed that the end time of the predetermined change display is approaching, and thereby, the expectation of the lottery result for the predetermined change display can be further increased.

  Also, the symbols displayed in the predetermined display area in the symbol row that has been stopped from the variable display before the predetermined variable display (a part of the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display) are: Since the stop symbol corresponding to the first result cannot be stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area when the symbol is included, the second variable display is executed in one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display. When the other symbol sequence that fluctuates is stopped, it is possible to prevent the stop symbol corresponding to the first result from being stopped and displayed.

  Note that the "predetermined attention display" in the gaming machine described in the feature A0 is a stop display in a state where some of the plurality of symbol rows constitute a part of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first result. May be displayed (so-called “reach display”), a display of a character (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit, or a suggestion effect based on light emission of the light-emitting unit (for ease of transition to the special game state). Effect that indicates the degree or degree of expectation).

<Feature A1>
The gaming machine according to feature A0,
In the first variation display, in a state where the other symbol row is fluctuating, a symbol that cannot constitute the first result in a symbol row different from the other symbol row has stopped in the predetermined display area. A gaming machine, wherein the other symbol row is stopped so as to be a stopped symbol which is a combination of the predetermined symbol.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature A1, in the first variable display, the symbol row stopped prior to another symbol row is synchronized with a predetermined attention display performed in the subsequent predetermined variable display, or Since the display is stopped until it is changed again at a timing that is a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined change display, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the most changed symbol sequence, and the predetermined change display due to the most change Expectation of the lottery result can be appropriately increased.

<Feature B0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol columns,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for variably displaying the plurality of symbol rows on the display section when the start condition is satisfied, and then stopping and displaying the symbols in a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means; When,
When the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the special execution state is a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state after being stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the fluctuation execution means. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating
If the start condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for storing the information until the variable execution means executes the variable display corresponding to the information,
A predetermined effect based on information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and effect target information corresponding to execution of a predetermined variable display executed after at least one or more variable displays are executed. Effect execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
In the predetermined effect, as a variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution unit, a part of symbols (second sub-symbol 713B) that does not constitute a stop symbol corresponding to the first result is displayed. When the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, the display is continuously displayed in the predetermined display area (middle line L2) where the transition to the special game state is performed during the entire period of the variable display. The effect of changing and displaying different symbol columns (left symbol column, right symbol column) different from the symbol column (the middle symbol column) including the partial symbol among the symbol columns described above. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the symbol display starts changing display of the effect symbol and performs a jackpot lottery based on the result of the jackpot lottery. A configuration is known in which, when it is determined to generate a big hit, a large hit symbol (for example, “777”) is stopped and the effect symbol is displayed and then a big hit is generated.

  Further, there is a conventional pachinko machine in which a result of a jackpot lottery is pre-read and a pre-reading effect is performed during a change of the effect symbol (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-291480). The look-ahead effect means that if a game ball wins in the starting winning opening while the design pattern is changing, the number of reserved balls is added, and a big hit lottery is performed based on the random value obtained at the winning timing, and the lottery Based on the result, it is an effect that gives a preview of a game state that is generated when the variation display of the effect symbol performed by digestion of the reserved ball ends. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first reserved ball is a jackpot, it is foreseen that a jackpot will occur when the next variable display following the current variable display ends.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to a gaming machine of a conventional configuration that performs a look-ahead effect. For example, in order to increase a player's interest in a look-ahead effect, diversification of the look-ahead effect is required.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature B0 can provide a gaming machine in which the look-ahead effect is diversified. That is, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the plurality of symbol columns are variably displayed on the display unit by the variability execution unit, and then the halting display is performed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. I do.

  If the starting condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation executing means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, whereby the information is stored. With the predetermined number set as the upper limit, it is possible to suspend until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable executing means.

  A predetermined effect is produced based on the information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and the effect target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least one or more variable displays are executed. It is executed by the execution means. By executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to amplify the sense of expectation of the subsequent display (stop display) of the lottery result with respect to the predetermined change display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In the predetermined effect, in the fluctuation display executed before the predetermined fluctuation display by the fluctuation executing means, some symbols that do not constitute the stop symbol corresponding to the first result are the stop symbols corresponding to the first result. Is displayed in the predetermined display area that will transition to the special game state when is stopped and displayed for the entire period of the variable display, and the symbol column including the partial symbol of a plurality of symbol columns is After another symbol row is variably displayed, the other symbol row is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, in the variable display executed before the predetermined variable display, it is shown that some symbols that do not constitute the stop symbol corresponding to the first result are displayed from the start to the end of the variable display, and the game is played. The person recognizes that the stop design corresponding to the first result is not displayed in the variable display, and thereby, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the subsequent predetermined variable display.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature B0, the “symbol that does not constitute the stop symbol corresponding to the first result” displayed in the predetermined display area during the entire period of the variable display is one symbol of the plurality of symbol columns. It may be a symbol included in the column, or a plurality of symbols included in a part or all of the symbol column excluding one symbol column among the plurality of symbol columns.

<Feature C0>
A game machine having a game area in which a game ball fired from a launch device (a launch device 330) flows down,
A ball guiding nail portion (nails 411A and 411B) including a plurality of game nails erected in such a manner that game balls can be guided in a predetermined direction side in the game area;
A plate-shaped light-transmitting nail supporting member (a region J of the base 401) having a light-transmitting property that supports the base end side of the plurality of game nails constituting the ball guiding nail portion and allows the front side to the rear side to be seen through. When,
A first passage (left first passage 1613A, right first passage 1613B) provided on the rear side of the light transmitting nail support member;
A passage component (guide passage 1612) for guiding game balls that have entered from a predetermined entrance (entrance 1611) of the game balls flowing down the game area to the first passage;
A detection unit (a left start winning switch 1441A, a right start winning switch 1441B) capable of detecting a game ball flowing down along the first passage;
A privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detection unit;
A second passage provided in a direction different from the first passage on an upstream side of the detection unit, wherein when a game ball enters from the first passage, the game ball is detected by the detection unit Second passages (left second passage 1614A, right second passage 1614B) that are not performed,
An information display unit that displays predetermined privilege no grant information (non-start prize area information) that allows a player to recognize that the second passage is a region where the predetermined privilege is not provided when a game ball enters; An information display unit 753).
The information display unit is located rearward of the light-transmitting nail support member, does not overlap the plurality of gaming nails in a front view of the gaming machine, and a player's viewpoint is located in front of the gaming machine. A gaming machine provided at a position overlapping a back side of the plurality of gaming nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, a configuration in which a bonus in a game is provided when a game sensor that has entered a winning port (for example, a starting port) provided in a game area is detected by a detection sensor (winning switch) ( For example, when a start prize is generated and a jackpot lottery is performed, and a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning port. (See, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

  Further, in a conventional pachinko machine, for a guide passage that guides a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance to a starting opening, it may be detected by a detection sensor that branches from the guiding passage and detects a winning in the starting opening. By providing a non-branch passage, even if a game ball enters the entrance, a part of the entry may not be a winning prize.

  However, as typified by the above-described gaming machine, when another passage is provided so that a part of the game ball that has entered the guide passage from a predetermined entrance does not become a prize giving a predetermined privilege, There may be room for improvement in configurations that allow the player to properly recognize the presence of the aisle.

  For example, when predetermined information is displayed so that a player can recognize the existence of an area where a game ball entered from a predetermined entrance is allowed to enter, such as the above-mentioned branch passage, which does not result in a start prize, the information indicates a start prize. While it is possible to inform the player of the existence of the area that does not require the game, there is also a possibility that the player may feel bored of the game when the game ball enters the area that does not receive the starting prize.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C0, when a game ball is detected, a part of the game ball entering from a predetermined entrance leading to a detection unit to which a predetermined privilege is provided has a predetermined privilege. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a configuration in which another passage is provided so as not to be awarded, and which can appropriately display the existence of the other passage. In other words, of the game balls flowing down the game area, the game balls entering from the predetermined entrance are guided to the first passage by the passage component. When a game ball flowing down along the first passage is detected by the detection unit, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means.

  On the other hand, a second passage branching in a direction different from the first passage is provided upstream of the detection unit, and a portion of the game ball flowing down the first passage can pass through the second passage. When the game ball enters the second passage, the game ball is not detected by the detection unit. Therefore, when a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance flows down the first passage and is detected by the detection unit, the player can obtain a predetermined privilege, but the player passes from the first passage to the second passage. When entering, the player cannot obtain a predetermined privilege.

  Since the first passage is provided on the back side of the plate-shaped light-transmitting nail supporting member having a light-transmitting property capable of seeing from the front side to the rear side, the player visually recognizes a game ball flowing down the first passage. In addition, the entry of the game ball from the first passage to the second passage can be visually recognized.

  An information display unit is provided behind the light-transmitting nail support member. The information display unit displays predetermined privilege non-giving information that allows a player to recognize that the second passage is an area where a predetermined privilege is not provided when a game ball enters. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized the predetermined privilege non-giving information recognizes that the second passage is an area where the predetermined privilege is not provided when the game ball enters.

  Since the information display unit is provided at a position overlapping the back side of the plurality of gaming nails in a predetermined oblique direction when the viewpoint of the player is located in front of the gaming machine, the viewpoint is determined by being played. The player located on the front side of the gaming machine sees the information display portion overlapping the back side of the plurality of gaming nails when looking at the predetermined oblique direction. Therefore, it is difficult for the player who is playing the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-giving information with a plurality of game nails, so that even when a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance enters the second passage via the first passage. In addition, discouragement of the player for not giving the predetermined privilege can be appropriately suppressed.

  On the other hand, the light-transmissive nail support member is configured as a member that supports the base end side of a plurality of game nails constituting the ball guiding nail portion. It is provided at a position that does not overlap the nail. Therefore, since the visibility of the information display unit from the front of the gaming machine is sufficiently ensured, the predetermined privilege non-giving information can be appropriately reported.

  The “predetermined privilege” described in the feature C0 is exemplified by occurrence of start winning, lottery condition, lottery probability, special game state generated when the lottery is won, the number of game balls paid out, and the like.

  In addition, the “position that overlaps the back side of the plurality of game nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction” described in the feature C0 overlaps the tip side in the oblique direction with respect to the plurality of game nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction. It may be a position.

<Feature C1>
The gaming machine according to feature C0,
A first rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) which is disposed rearward of the light transmitting nail support member and has a portion (passage wall portion 1631A) overlapping the front side of the information display portion in a game machine front view. A gaming machine, comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Feature C1, the first rear side portion having a portion overlapping the front side of the information display portion in the gaming machine front view is provided behind the light-transmitting nail support member. In addition, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the predetermined privilege non-giving information overlapping the rear side of the first rear side portion when viewed from the front. This makes it more difficult for the player who is playing the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-giving information, so that the discouragement of the player when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage via the first passage. More preferably, it can be suppressed.

<Feature C2>
The gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1,
A portion (passage wall) that is disposed behind the light-transmissive nail support member and overlaps the front side of the information display unit in the predetermined oblique direction when the viewpoint of the player is positioned in front of the gaming machine. A gaming machine comprising a second rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) having a portion 1631B).

  In the gaming machine according to the feature C2, the rear side of the light-transmitting nail supporting member is located at the front side of the information display unit in a predetermined oblique direction when the viewpoint of the player is located at the front side of the gaming machine. Since the second rear side portion having the overlapping portion is provided, the visibility of the predetermined privilege non-giving information overlapping the rear side of the second rear side portion when viewed from the front can be reduced. This makes it more difficult for the player who is playing the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-giving information, so that the discouragement of the player when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage via the first passage. More preferably, it can be suppressed.

<Feature C3>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C0 to C2,
The predetermined privilege no grant information is configured by a predetermined character string indicating that the predetermined privilege is not provided in the area,
The predetermined character string is arranged along an array of the plurality of gaming nails overlapping the front side of the information display unit in the predetermined oblique direction when the viewpoint of the player is located on the front side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C3, the predetermined privilege non-giving information is formed of a predetermined character string, and the predetermined character string is a predetermined oblique angle when the viewpoint of the player is located in front of the gaming machine. The game nails are arranged along an array of a plurality of game nails overlapping the front side of the information display unit in the directional view. Therefore, since many areas of the character string constituting the predetermined privilege non-giving information are arranged so as to overlap with a plurality of game nails in the predetermined oblique direction, the player who is playing the game does not have the predetermined privilege non-giving information. Is more difficult to recognize. Therefore, discouragement of the player when the game ball entering from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage via the first passage can be more suitably suppressed.

<Feature D0>
A game board (base 401) having a game area on the front side in which a game ball can flow down and having an opening formed in the game area;
A decorative surface (base 701) provided behind the game board and located in the opening when viewed from the front of the game machine;
A plurality of symbol rows constituted by arranging a plurality of the torso are arranged by rotating the respective torso, and each of the plurality of symbol rows is displayed in a fluctuating manner. A variable display unit configured to be provided in the opening of the game board, wherein a part of the plurality of torso protrudes forward from the opening so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized. (Reel device 710),
The plurality of symbols are provided at positions overlapping with the front sides of the plurality of torso so that the symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in a front view of the gaming machine protrudes forward in a substantially arc shape. A display cover portion configured in a plate shape, wherein when a light is irradiated from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a direction in which the plate-shaped plate surface is continuous, a predetermined image is formed by the light. A display cover portion (resin cover 715) having a light guide portion (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying (picture 743);
A game board image display unit provided at least at a part of a periphery of the opening in the game board and provided on at least one side of the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide unit, and a predetermined image together with the predetermined image; A game board image display unit (picture 741) that constitutes a part of a decorative image (a fish school pointing to the left) that is continuous to the direction side of
The decoration surface is provided between the light guide section and the game board image display section of the display cover section in a game machine front view, and the continuous decoration is provided together with the predetermined image and the game board image display section. A gaming machine comprising a decorative surface image display section (picture pattern 742) constituting a part of an image.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

  In such a conventional pachinko machine, a game corresponding to a lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, or various effect images are displayed to improve the interest of the game. There is also known a configuration in which a lottery result is displayed by printing a symbol on a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged to rotate. However, in a gaming machine having a three-dimensional torso in which a plurality of symbols are arranged to orbit, it may be difficult to provide a display area for effect in a wide range.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature D0, even if the gaming machine has a three-dimensional torso arranged so that a plurality of symbols orbit, a wide display area for effect can be suitably provided. An installable gaming machine can be provided. That is, the variable display unit turns each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies into a single symbol row with the three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that the plurality of symbols circulate around each rotating body. The display is configured to be able to be changed and displayed by being moved. The variable display portion is provided in an opening formed in a game area of the game board, wherein a part of a plurality of torso members protrude forward from the opening so that a plurality of symbols can be visually recognized.

  At a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of torso so that the plurality of symbols in the variable display portion can be visually recognized, a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine protrudes forward in a substantially arc shape. A display cover unit configured in a plate shape is provided. The display cover section can emit a predetermined image with the light when the display cover section emits light from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a direction in which the plate-shaped plate surface is continuous in the display cover section. Light guide.

  A game board image display section is provided on at least a part of the periphery of the opening in the game board and on at least one side of a predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide section of the display cover section. Since the game board image display unit constitutes a part of the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction along with the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide unit, the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side is displayed in the light guide unit. Can be displayed beyond the display range. Thereby, the effect of the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction can be made more impressive than when the decorative image is displayed using only the light guide.

  However, if there is a structural separation between the opening of the game board and the display cover, the predetermined image displayed on the light guide unit and the game board image display unit cause a predetermined gap. There is a possibility that the effect of the decorative image continuous on the direction side may give an unnatural feeling.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature D0, the decorative surface located in the opening of the gaming plate is provided on the rear side of the gaming plate in a front view of the gaming machine, and the decorative surface is located in a front view of the gaming machine. Between the light guide section and the game board image display section of the game board, there is provided a decoration surface image display section which is a part of a decoration image continuous in a predetermined direction.

  Thus, even when a structural separation occurs between the opening of the game board and the display cover (light guide), the predetermined image displayed on the light guide and the game board image display are displayed. Can be compensated for by the decorative surface image display unit. Therefore, it is possible to realize the effect by the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction displayed beyond the display range by the light guide unit as a suitable effect in which unnaturalness due to discontinuity is suppressed.

<Feature D1>
The gaming machine according to feature D0,
A side wall surface (side wall portion 702) provided between the peripheral portion of the opening of the game board and the decoration surface and extending in a direction intersecting with the game plate and the decoration surface;
The side wall surface is provided between the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, and together with the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, a part of the continuous decorative image. A gaming machine, comprising: a side wall surface image display section (a pattern connecting a pattern 741 and a pattern 742).

  In the gaming machine according to the feature D1, a side wall surface extending in a direction intersecting the gaming plate and the decorative surface is provided between the peripheral edge of the opening in the gaming plate and the decorative surface. On the side wall surface, a side wall surface image display unit is provided between the decoration surface image display unit of the decoration surface and the image display unit of the game board. The side wall surface image display unit is configured to be a part of a decoration image that is continuous in a predetermined direction side together with the decoration surface image display unit and the game board image display unit. Therefore, the discontinuity in the height direction due to the height difference between the game board and the decoration surface can be compensated for by the side wall surface image display unit. Thereby, the continuity of the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side is improved, so that unnaturalness due to discontinuity in the effect by the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side can be more suitably suppressed.

<Feature D2>
The gaming machine according to Feature D0 or Feature D1,
The light guide unit may be configured to transfer a first image (patterns 743B, 743C), which is a part of one image constituting a decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction, below a top portion located at the forefront of the display cover unit. In a predetermined region (regions R1 and R2) on the side so as to be displayed as a part of the predetermined image,
The decorative surface image display unit is displayed at a position adjacent to the first image displayed on the light guide unit and forms a second image together with the first image (patterns 742B and 742C). A gaming machine characterized by including:

  In the gaming machine according to the feature D2, the first image displayed on the light guide unit and the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display unit form a decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction. One image is formed. Thereby, one image constituting the decorative image that is continuous in the predetermined direction can be arranged at the boundary between the light guide portion and the decorative surface, so that the continuity in the decorative image can be suitably increased.

  In particular, since the first image is displayed in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover unit, the height difference from the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display unit (decorative surface) ( Height in the front-rear direction) can be kept low. Therefore, since distortion of one image composed of the first image and the second image can be suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult for the one image to be uncomfortable.

<Feature E0>
A game board (base 401) having a game area on the front side in which a game ball can flow down and having an opening formed in the game area;
A variable display unit (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display section variably displays the plurality of symbol columns, and then stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means (sub-control board 940). )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the variation executing means at a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a game more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is a state,
A display cover (resin cover 715) provided to protrude forward from a position where the stop symbol is displayed;
A light-emitting operation unit (press operation device 261) that is arranged toward the upper side of the display cover unit below the game machine front view and is operable by the player;
The operation unit is displayed in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operable period) in which an input to the operation unit is valid or a notification period that is earlier than the operation valid period and notifies the operation valid period. Light emission control means for emitting light (sub-control board 940);
A reflecting portion (half mirror 761B) that is provided in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion and is capable of reflecting light emitted from the operation portion so that a player can visually reflect the reflected light; And a gaming machine comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening.

  In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a predetermined effect such as a change in display content on a display device or a corresponding sound output from a speaker is performed. Also known are gaming machines (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329). Some gaming machines of this type are configured to emit light to the operation unit so as to notify a player of an operation time of the operation unit.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to notify a player of an operation time of the operation unit by emitting light of the operation unit. For example, since a player tends to gaze at a variable display performed on a display device, it is difficult to recognize an operation time of the operation unit notified by light emission of an operation unit provided below the display device. was there.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature E0, in the configuration in which the operation time of the operation unit is notified to the player by the light emission of the operation unit, the operation time of the operation unit is appropriately recognized by the player. Can be provided. That is, in the game board in which a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area when the game machine is viewed from the front, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs variation display of a plurality of symbol rows on the variation display section, and then stops and displays the symbols in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols showing the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  A display cover portion is provided in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by a player is arranged upwardly below the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The operation unit is configured to emit light. The operation unit is controlled by the light emission control unit, and is synchronized with an operation valid period in which an input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period that is earlier than the operation valid period and reports the operation valid period. Light is emitted in a predetermined color.

  Here, in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion, a reflection portion is provided which can reflect the light emitted from the operation portion so that the player can visually reflect the reflected light. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the operation unit as the light reflected by the reflection unit. This makes it difficult for the player to miss the notification of the operation time of the operation unit by the light emission of the operation unit, even in a situation where the player pays attention to the change display unit, and it is easy to recognize the operation time.

  In addition, since the operation time of the operation unit is notified to the player using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase due to the notification. Therefore, also in this respect, the player can appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for notifying the operation timing of the operation unit by an image or the like, the manufacturing cost and the control load do not increase, and this is not a problem. Also, the player can appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit.

<Feature E1>
The gaming machine according to Feature E0,
The fluctuation display unit is configured such that a plurality of symbols are arranged around the three-dimensional rotating body as one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies is referred to as each rotating body. Each of the plurality of torso is configured to protrude forward from the opening in the game board, and is configured to be capable of being changed and displayed by being rotated,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of torso so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross-section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine has a front side. A gaming machine characterized by being formed in a plate shape protruding in a substantially arc shape.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature E1, the variable display unit is configured such that a three-dimensional torso arranged so that a plurality of symbols orbits is a single symbol row, and a plurality of the torso including the torso are arranged. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be variably displayed by turning each of the plurality of turning bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is displayed on a screen of a display unit such as an LCD, the operation validity period can be notified by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. is there. However, in the gaming machine of the feature E1, in which a symbol is changed and displayed by the torso, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the torso due to its structure.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature E1, a part of the plurality of rotating bodies intersects the front side of the variable display portion provided to protrude forward from the opening of the gaming board in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. A plate-shaped display cover portion is provided in which a section viewed from a predetermined direction side projects forward in a substantially arc shape on the front side. By providing the reflecting portion in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion, light emitted from the operating portion can be visually recognized by the player as reflected light by the reflecting portion.

<Feature E2>
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein:
A predetermined display unit (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided in the opening of the game board and at a rear end side and a lower side of the predetermined area in a front view of the gaming machine is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In the gaming machine according to the feature E2, the predetermined display portion provided in the opening of the game board is provided at a rear end side and a lower side of a predetermined area in the front view of the gaming machine, so that the predetermined display is provided. The region where the display content of the portion is reflected on the reflection portion can be stopped at the limited region on the rear end side of the reflection portion. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light of the light emitting unit reflected by the reflecting unit from being hindered by display contents of the predetermined display unit reflected on the reflecting unit. Also, without increasing the size of the reflecting portion (that is, without increasing the forward projection of the display cover portion), an area where the light of the light emitting portion is reflected by the reflecting portion (an image is formed by the light of the light emitting portion). Region) can be secured largely in front of the reflecting portion.

<Feature F0>
A game board (base 401) having a game area on the front side in which a game ball can flow down and having an opening formed in the game area;
A variable display unit (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display section variably displays the plurality of symbol columns, and then stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means (sub-control board 940). )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the variation executing means at a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a game more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is a state,
A display cover (resin cover 715) provided to protrude forward from a position where the stop symbol is displayed;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) which is arranged toward the upper side of the display cover unit below the game machine front view and operable by the player;
A light-emitting unit (wave lamp 771) arranged on one side of the operation unit and capable of emitting light;
The light emitting unit is turned on in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operable period) in which an input to the operation unit is valid, or in advance of the operation valid period and a notification period for reporting the operation valid period. Light emission control means for emitting light (sub-control board 940);
A reflecting portion (half mirror 761B) which is provided in a predetermined area below the foremost portion of the display cover portion and which can reflect light emitted from the light emitting portion so that a player can visually reflect the reflected light; And a gaming machine comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening.

  In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a predetermined effect such as a change in display content on a display device or a corresponding sound output from a speaker is performed. Also known are gaming machines (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329). Some gaming machines of this type can notify a player of an operation time of an operation unit by configuring a light emitting unit provided around an operation unit to emit light.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a conventional gaming machine configured to notify a player of an operation time of an operation unit by light emission of a light emitting unit. For example, since the player tends to gaze at the variable display performed on the display device, the operation timing of the operation unit notified by the light emission of the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit provided below the display device There was a problem that it was difficult to recognize.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F0, the operation timing of the operation unit is notified to the player by the light emission of the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit. Can be provided so that the player can appropriately recognize the game. That is, in the game board in which a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area when the game machine is viewed from the front, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs variation display of a plurality of symbol rows on the variation display section, and then stops and displays the symbols in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols showing the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  A display cover portion is provided in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by a player is arranged upwardly below the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. A light-emitting unit capable of emitting light is arranged on one side of the operation unit. The light emitting unit is controlled by the light emission control unit, and is synchronized with a valid operation period in which an input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period that is earlier than the valid operation period and notifies the valid operation period. Is emitted in the color of

  Here, in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion, a reflection portion is provided which can reflect the light emitted from the light emitting portion so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting unit as reflected light by the reflecting unit. This makes it difficult for the player to miss the notification of the operation time of the operation unit by the light emission of the light emitting unit, even in a situation where the player pays attention to the change display unit, and it is easy to recognize the operation time.

  In addition, since the operation time of the operation unit is notified to the player using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase due to the notification. Therefore, also in this respect, the player can appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for notifying the operation timing of the operation unit by an image or the like, the manufacturing cost and the control load do not increase, and this is not a problem. Also, the player can appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit.

<Feature F1>
The gaming machine according to Feature F0,
The fluctuation display unit is configured such that a plurality of symbols are arranged around the three-dimensional rotating body as one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies is referred to as each rotating body. Each of the plurality of torso is configured to protrude forward from the opening in the game board, and is configured to be capable of being changed and displayed by being rotated,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of torso so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross-section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine has a front side. A gaming machine characterized by being formed in a plate shape protruding in a substantially arc shape.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F1, the variable display unit is configured by arranging the three-dimensional torso arranged such that a plurality of symbols orbit as one symbol row, and arranging a plurality of the torso including the torso. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be variably displayed by turning each of the plurality of turning bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is displayed on a screen of a display unit such as an LCD, an operation timing can be notified by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. . However, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the torso due to the structure of the gaming machine having the feature F1 in which a symbol is fluctuated and displayed by the torso.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature F1, a part of the plurality of rotating bodies intersects in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine, in front of the variable display portion provided to protrude forward from the opening of the gaming board. A plate-shaped display cover portion is provided in which a section viewed from a predetermined direction side projects forward in a substantially arc shape on the front side. By providing the reflecting portion in a predetermined area below the top located at the forefront of the display cover portion, light emitted from the operating portion can be visually recognized by the player as reflected light by the reflecting portion.

<Feature F2>
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
A second light emitting unit (reel side lamp 717A) provided between the turning body and the turning body and capable of emitting light;
The light emission control unit causes the second light emitting unit to emit light in the same color as the color emitted from the light emitting unit when the light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined color in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In the gaming machine described in the feature F2, a second light-emitting unit capable of emitting light is provided between the turning body and the turning body. The second light emitting unit emits light in the same color as the light emitting unit that emits light in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period by the light emission control unit. Therefore, the notification of the operation timing is provided not only by the reflected light from the reflecting unit but also from the second light emitting unit provided on the variable display unit (more specifically, between the torso and the torso), which is easily noticed by the player. Is performed by the direct light, so that it is possible to appropriately suppress the player from missing the notification of the operation timing.

<Feature F3>
The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2,
The torso is configured to be capable of emitting and displaying the symbol,
The gaming machine, wherein the reflector is configured to reflect light incident from the front side and transmit light incident from the rear side.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F3, since the reflecting portion is configured to reflect the light incident from the front side and transmit the light incident from the rear side, it is possible to illuminate and display the symbol on the torso. The illuminated symbol can be visually recognized by the player via the reflection unit. Therefore, since the reflection portion can be arranged in front of the symbol in the rotating body, it is possible to prevent the size of the display cover portion from becoming too large.

<Feature F4>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F3,
A predetermined display unit (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided in the opening of the game board and at a rear end side and a lower side of the predetermined area in a front view of the gaming machine is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In the gaming machine described in the feature F4, the predetermined display portion provided in the opening of the game board is provided at the rear end side and below the predetermined region in the game machine front view. The region where the display content of the portion is reflected on the reflection portion can be stopped at the limited region on the rear end side of the reflection portion. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light of the light emitting unit reflected by the reflecting unit from being hindered by display contents of the predetermined display unit reflected on the reflecting unit. Also, the area where the light of the light emitting section is reflected by the reflecting section (the area where the image of the light of the light emitting section is formed) without increasing the size of the reflecting section (that is, without increasing the forward projection of the display cover). ) Can be secured largely on the front side of the reflecting portion.

<Feature G0>
A variable display section (reel device 710) capable of displaying a plurality of symbol rows in a variable manner;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variable display section variably displays the plurality of symbol columns, and then stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to a result of the lottery by the lottery means (sub-control board 940). )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the variation executing means at a stop symbol corresponding to the first result, a game more advantageous than the normal game state Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is a state,
An operation unit (press operation device 261) operable by a player;
When the operation unit is operated by the player, at least two symbol columns (left symbol column, left symbol column, which can constitute a part of a combination of stopped symbols corresponding to the first result) among the plurality of symbol columns. A game machine comprising: display area control means (sub-control board 940) for reducing the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed by moving the position of the right symbol row.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a ball is entered into the starting port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entered ball, and if a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

  Such a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a display device (display unit), and on the display device, a variable display of symbols is started based on the lottery being performed, and a final stop display of the variable display is performed. As a result, a stop result according to the lottery result is displayed.

  However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine, such as the gaming machine described above, in which the display of a symbol is changed on the display unit. For example, when a symbol that is fluctuated is displayed in a large size, a large symbol can give a strong impression of the fluctuating display to the player, but depending on the player, the region in which the fluctuating display is performed is large in view. In some cases, it became too difficult to see the variable display.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature G0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to appropriately change the appearance of the display unit as needed. In other words, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means performs variation display of a plurality of symbol rows on the variation display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols in a combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. . At this time, if the lottery result is the predetermined first result, after the symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the symbols showing the first result, the special game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  An operation unit that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation unit is operated by the player, a part of the combination of the stopped symbols corresponding to the first result among the plurality of symbol columns is displayed. The positions of the at least two configurable symbol columns are moved by the display area control means, thereby reducing the display range in which the at least two symbol columns are displayed. In this way, the player can operate the operation unit as needed, thereby reducing the display area of the plurality of symbol rows, thereby suppressing the player from feeling that the variable display is difficult to see.

Also, by moving the position of at least two symbol columns, the display range in which the at least two symbol columns are displayed is reduced, so that the appearance of the at least two symbol columns before and after the display range is reduced. There is no change in the size, and it is possible to suppress the difficulty in viewing these symbol rows due to the reduced display range. In particular, since the at least two symbol columns are symbol columns that can constitute a part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result, the player responds to the first result by the at least two symbol columns. When a part of the combinations of stop symbols to be displayed is displayed, the player can visually recognize the display appropriately.
Note that “reducing the display range” described in the feature G0 may be to reduce either the up-down direction or the left-right direction of the display range, and to reduce both the up-down direction and the left-right direction of the display range. It may be made smaller.

<Feature G1>
The gaming machine according to Feature G0,
The fluctuation display unit is configured such that a plurality of symbols are arranged around the three-dimensional rotating body as one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies is referred to as each rotating body. It is configured to be able to change display by rotating,
The gaming machine is
The first torso (left reel 711L, right reel 711R) corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can form a part of the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result among the plurality of torso. First moving means (gears 782, 783, rack gears corresponding to the gears 782, 783) that can move in a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction as viewed from the front of the machine;
A second moving means (gears 781 and 781 corresponding to gears 781 and 781) capable of moving a second turning body (middle reel 711M) different from the first turning body among the plurality of turning bodies to a rear side in a game machine front view. Rack gear), and
The display area control means, when the player operates the operation unit, moves the second body so as to be rearward from the first body by the second moving means, and then performs the first time A gaming machine wherein a display area of the plurality of symbol rows is reduced by moving a body by the first moving means.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the variable display unit is configured by arranging the three-dimensional torso arranged such that a plurality of symbols orbit as one symbol row, and arranging a plurality of the torso including the torso. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be variably displayed by turning each of the plurality of turning bodies.

  Of the plurality of torso, the first torso corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can constitute a part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result is provided by the first moving unit in the gaming machine front view. It is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction crossing the front-back direction. On the other hand, of the plurality of torso bodies, a second torso body different from the first torso body is configured to be movable rearward in the game machine front view by the second moving means.

  When the operation unit is operated by the player, after the second body is moved by the second moving means behind the first body by the display area control means, the first body is moved to the second body. It is moved by one moving means. Thereby, the display area of the plurality of symbol rows can be reduced.

<Feature G2>
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein
The first torso is a torso located at least at both ends of the plurality of torso,
The gaming machine, wherein the first moving means is configured to be movable by substantially the same distance in a direction in which the second round bodies located at both ends of the plurality of round bodies approach each other.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature G2, when the operation unit is operated by the player, the second round bodies located at both ends of the plurality of round bodies are substantially respectively moved in the directions approaching each other by the first moving unit. Moved the same distance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the center of the display area of the plurality of symbol rows from moving due to the reduction. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the player's line of sight when watching the symbol change display due to the reduction of the display area of the plurality of symbol rows.

  Note that at least one feature described in the features 10 to G2 may be applied in combination with any other or a plurality of features. Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko machine: launch operation means operated by a player, game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, a passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine, comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a game area; wherein a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player is operated according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

  100 gaming machine, 261 press operation device, 263 selection operation device, 479 decoration image display device, 710 reel device, 711L left reel, 711M middle reel, 711R right reel, 712 main design, 713B .., A main control board, 940, a sub control board, 401, a base, 701, a base, 702, a side wall, 715, a resin cover, 715B, a light guide plate, 717A. Reel side lamp, 720 ... Hold lamp, 741,742,743 ... Picture, 753 ... Information display section, 761A, 761B ... Half mirror, 771 ... Wave lamp, 781,782,783 ... Gear, 1441A, 1441B ... Start winning switch , 1610 entrance, 1612 guide path, 1613A, 1613B first path, 1614A, 1614B Second passage, 1631 ... first back side, second back side, 1631A, 1631B ... passage wall portion

Claims (2)

A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball fired from a launch device flows down,
A ball guiding nail portion comprising a plurality of gaming nails erected side by side so as to be able to guide game balls in a predetermined direction side in the game area,
A plate-shaped light-transmitting nail supporting member having a light-transmitting property capable of seeing from the front side to the rear side, supporting a base end side of the plurality of game nails constituting the ball guiding nail portion,
A first passage provided on a rear side of the light-transmitting nail supporting member;
A passage component that guides a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance among the game balls flowing down the game area to the first passage;
A detection unit capable of detecting a game ball flowing down along the first passage;
A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detection unit;
A second passage provided in a direction different from the first passage on an upstream side of the detection unit, wherein when a game ball enters from the first passage, the game ball is detected by the detection unit A second passage that is not performed,
An information display unit for displaying predetermined privilege no grant information that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area where the predetermined privilege is not granted when the game ball enters,
The information display unit is located rearward of the light-transmitting nail support member, does not overlap the plurality of gaming nails in a front view of the gaming machine, and a player's viewpoint is located in front of the gaming machine. A gaming machine provided at a position overlapping a back side of the plurality of gaming nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.